1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Secutron Manuals
  4. Control Unit
  5. MODUL-R MR-2100
  6. Installation manual

Secutron MR-2100 Installation Manual

Fire alarm control unit
Hide thumbs Also See for MR-2100:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

See also: Operating Instructions
Fire Alarm Systems
sm
MANUALS
CANADA
25 Interchange Way
Vaughan (Toronto), Ontario L4K 5W3
Telephone: 888.732.8876 Fax: 888.660.4113
U.S.A.
60 Industrial Parkway
Cheektowaga (Buffalo), NY 14227
Telephone: 888.732.8876 Fax: 888.660.4113
Web Site:
www.secutron.com
Email:
mail@secutron.com
a member of the

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the MR-2100 and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Subscribe to Our Youtube Channel

Related Manuals for Secutron MR-2100

Summary of Contents for Secutron MR-2100

  • Page 1 Fire Alarm Systems MANUALS CANADA 25 Interchange Way Vaughan (Toronto), Ontario L4K 5W3 Telephone: 888.732.8876 Fax: 888.660.4113 U.S.A. 60 Industrial Parkway Cheektowaga (Buffalo), NY 14227 Telephone: 888.732.8876 Fax: 888.660.4113 Web Site: www.secutron.com Email: mail@secutron.com a member of the...
  • Page 2 MR-2100/2200 Fire Alarm Control Unit NSTALLATION ANUAL Revision E Document #: LT-2000 WARNING: This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
  • Page 3 Secutron Inc. Secutron Inc. 25 Interchange Way Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3 Please call us at 1-888-695-3545 if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
  • Page 4 Cautions and Warnings READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depends upon proper installation. DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED. Upon unpacking your equipment, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage.

  • Page 5: Table Of Contents

    1.7 System Components........................3 2.0 Technical Specifications .......................... 8 2.1 Electrical Specifications ........................8 3.0 Installation ..............................11 3.1 Unpacking the MR-2100 or MR-2200 ..................... 11 3.2 Mounting and Assembling the MR-2200..................11 3.3 Internal Assembly ........................... 14 3.4 Wiring.............................. 16 3.5 Maximum Wiring Length for Addressable Circuits ................
  • Page 6 MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual...
  • Page 7 Table 5: Function Relay Output Circuits......................9 Table 6: Power Outputs..........................9 Table 7: Communications Ports ........................10 Table 8: Environmental Specifications ......................10 Table 9: Secutron Compatible Addressable Devices ..................22 Table 10: System Sensor Compatible Addressable Devices ................. 23...
  • Page 8 MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual...

  • Page 9: Technical Information

    The MR-2100/MR-2200 includes the following features: • MR-2100: One (1) Addressable Input (SLC) circuit, Class A (Style 6) or Class B (Style 4). • MR-2200: Two (2) Addressable Input (SLC) circuits, Class A (Style 6) or Class B (Style 4).

  • Page 10: General Installation Requirements

    MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual 1.4 Applications & Services This fire alarm control panel is listed for use in the following applications: • Local with networking for UL (only) installations • Auxiliary (Requires MRCTYB Reverse Polarity Municipal Box Module configured for Municipal Master Box Operation) •...

  • Page 11: System Components

    Function Relays, two Auxiliary power points, one or two Signal Line Circuits (SLCs), and communications ports for the Display Board and optional equipment. The MR-2100 Main Board has one SLC for connecting System Sensor Addressable devices. The MR-2200 Main Board has two SLCs. Each SLC can support 198 total devices, 99 detectors/sensors and 99 control/ monitor type devices.
  • Page 12 MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual Display Board The Display Board provides LED and LCD status annunciation, hotkeys, and keypads for message retrieval and programming. A replacement Display can be ordered under PID SMR22DPCB. Optional (Internal) Components NAC Expander Board - PID MRNC2 The NAC Expander Board provides two additional NAC output circuits.
  • Page 13 There are four distinct versions of this network interface module. For information on wiring each assembly refer to the MR22NTW Network Card Installation Instructions (579-541). Secutron Network cards meet requirements for UL864 only. The MR22NTWR version features two standard ports that provide direct wire connectivity between multiple FACPs.
  • Page 14 MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual MR22NTWR12 The MR22NTWR12 provides the network interface between the MR-2200 and the rest of the control units on a peer-to-peer network. This module plugs directly into the MR-2200 main board. The MR22NTWR12 version features Port 1 and Port as both RS232.
  • Page 15 MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual MR-2944 The MR-2944 is a network annunciator with Liquid Crystal Display and/or LED Zone display, general system status lights, and general function keys. Refer to the MR-2944 Annunciator Unit Installation Manual (29004339). Testing Circuit Supervision Use the following procedures in the table below to confirm that SLCs and NACs are supervising for opens, shorts, and grounds.

  • Page 16: Table 1: Ac Input

    MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual 2.0 Technical Specifications 2.1 Electrical Specifications Table 1: AC Input Circuit / Model / Item Rating Standard Primary AC Input 1 MR2100R, MR2100B, CA2100E, CA2100F, 120V, 60Hz, 2.0 A maximum MR2200R, MR2200B, CA2200E, CA2200F MR2100R2, MR2100B2, MR2200R2, 240V, 50Hz, 1.0 A maximum...

  • Page 17: Table 3: Addressable Input (Signaling Line Circuit)

    *Total NAC Current - 1 Transformer: NACs + AUX < 2.5A, 2 Transformers: 7A Table 5: Function Relay Output Circuits Circuit / Model / Item Rating MR-2100/2200 Mainboard and MRRL4 Relay Expander RELAY1, RELAY2, RELAY3, RELAY4 Form C contact, 2A, 30Vdc resistive, power limited source only.

  • Page 18: Table 7: Communications Ports

    MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual Table 7: Communications Ports Port Rating COM1, COM2 (Secutron MR peer- 10km (33,000 feet) maximum distance to-peer network, redundant DCLR) between nodes, minimum 28 AWG wires. Pro- grammable baud rate with up to 200 panels at 1200 bps, 254 panels at 2400, 4800, and 9600 bps.

  • Page 19: Installation

    NFPA 72, or ULC-S524 and CEC Part 1 Section 32. Surface and Flush Mounting The MR-2100/MR-2200 can be mounted in either flush or surface mount installations. Before installing the 2100/22200 Panel the following should be considered. 1. Determine a suitable location for mounting the FACP. Keep in mind that surrounding walls, fixtures, must not hinder access to internal components.
  • Page 20 MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual Replacing the Outer Door 1. Unlock the Door with the key provided. 2. Detach the grounding strap (734-004, Qty: 2) from the backbox by removing the #6 flange nuts (Qty: 2) that are attached to the studs on the backbox. Reattach the #6 flange nuts (Qty: 2) to the studs to prevent them from getting lost or discarded.

  • Page 21: Figure 1: Knockouts And Mounting Holes

    MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual 14-1/2" (368 mm) 7/8" (23 mm) lip each side 3/4" (19 mm) lip top and bottom 16-1/8" (410 mm) 5-1/2" (140 mm) 3" (76 mm) 1-1/4" (32 mm) 21-3/4" (552 mm) 27-1/2" 29" 26-1/2" (699 mm) (740 mm) (673 mm) 8-1/2"...

  • Page 22: Figure 2: Power Limited Wiring Diagram

    MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual 3.3 Internal Assembly • Attach AC wiring to the AC Terminal Block (see Figure 4 on page 16). Attach green ground wire to ground screw on backplate. Notes: • Do not apply power to the unit until all doors, cables and wiring are installed and inspected.

  • Page 23: Figure 3: Power Limited Wiring, City Module

    MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual Figure 3: Power Limited Wiring, City Module...

  • Page 24: Figure 4: Ac Power Wiring Diagram

    MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual 3.4 Wiring Power Connections The Main Control Unit requires an AC power supply. This supply is connected as shown below: RED Batt + BLK Batt - To Batteries To Bridge TB16 EARTH NEUT Secondary BLUE Secondary BLUE...

  • Page 25: Figure 5. External Battery Cabinet Wiring

    MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual The internal batteries are not used when an external battery box is used. The wires for connecting the power supply board to the batteries are supplied with the panel if a battery box is ordered at the same time.

  • Page 26: Figure 6: Class B Wiring

    The recommended wiring is twisted unshielded pair. Wire capacitance and resistance will affect the allowable wire length. Consult Secutron's Applications Department for specific requirements. Maximum wire lengths are up to 10,000 ft (see Appendix). Devices will be connected as indicated in the diagram below.

  • Page 27: Figure 8: Class B Nac Wiring

    MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual Notification Appliance Circuit Connections Class B (Style Y) NAC This is a 2-wire Class B (Style Y) supervised signaling (notification appliance) circuit. Devices and the 10k ohm end-of-line resister will be connected as indicated in the figure below. Maximum wire lengths are shown in the Appendix.

  • Page 28: Maximum Wiring Length For Addressable Circuits

    MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual EVAX System Wiring Conduit MR-2100 / MR-2200 MV 2700 M 20’ Max Main Board Notes: • For all EVAX installations, the maximum wiring distance from the FACP to the HMX panel is 20 feet in conduit. The two panels must be in the same room.

  • Page 29: Maximum Wiring Length For Bell Circuits

    MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual 3.6 Maximum Wiring Length for Bell Circuits 12AWG 14AWG 16AWG 18AWG Max R Max I 7.06 0.25 2179 1368 3.06 1.06 0.66 1.25 0.39 0.20 1.75 0.06 Note: Distances noted in this table account for the total length of wire, from the panel to furthest...

  • Page 30: Table 9: Secutron Compatible Addressable Devices

    MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual 4.0 Appendix A: Compatible Addressable Devices Table 9: Secutron Compatible Addressable Devices Typical Current Model Description Draw µA MRI-1251 Ionization type smoke detector MRI-1251B Ionization type smoke detector MRI-2251 Photoelectric type smoke detector MRI-2251B Photoelectric type smoke detector...

  • Page 31: Table 10: System Sensor Compatible Addressable Devices

    MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual Table 10: System Sensor Compatible Addressable Devices Typical Current Model Description Draw µA 1251 Ionization type smoke detector 1251B Ionization type smoke detector 2251 Photoelectric type smoke detector 2251B Photoelectric type smoke detector 2251T Photoelectric type smoke detector w/ thermal element...

  • Page 32: Battery Calculation Worksheet

    MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual 5.0 Appendix B: Battery Calculations & Compatible Batteries 5.1 Battery Calculation Worksheet 1. Enter the number of each installed module type in the ’Quantity’ column next to the appro- priate module description. 2. For each quantity entry, multiply the value in the ’Quantity’ column by the value in the ’Standby’...
  • Page 33 MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual Device Standby Total Alarm Total Device Type Qty. Current Standby Current Alarm MR-2200 mainboard w/ LCD 110mA 110mA 175mA 175mA display & primary power supply M22NTW Network Card 50mA _____ mA 50mA 50mA MRCN2 NAC output extender...

  • Page 34: Battery Selection Calculations

    MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual 5.2 Battery Selection Calculations 1. From previous calculations, locate total Standby Current (A) and convert to amperes. A = ________ (Note: amperes = mA ÷ 1000; µA ÷ 1,000,000; examples: 250 mA = 0.25 A; 1500 µA = 0.0015 A)

  • Page 35: Appendix C: Compatible Notification Appliances

    MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual 6.0 Appendix C: Compatible Notification Appliances 6.1 Wheelock Current Draw @ 24VDC Description Model Audible Visual AH-24* Mini Horn, indoor AH-24WP* Mini Horn, indoor/outdoor AS-241575W* Audible Strobe 107 (combined) AS-2415C* Audible Strobe 98 (combined) AS-2430C* Audible Strobe...
  • Page 36 MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual Current Draw @ 24VDC Model Description Audible Visual ET70 -2475W Strobe Speaker ET70 -24110W Strobe Speaker ET90-2415W Strobe Speaker ET90-241575W Strobe Speaker ET90-24 30W Strobe Speaker ET90-2475W Strobe Speaker ET90-24110W Strobe Speaker ET90-2415C Strobe Speaker ET90-2430C Strobe Speaker...

  • Page 37: Gentex

    MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual 6.2 Gentex Current Draw @ 24VDC Model Description Audible Visual GEH24 Commander2 Horn GES24-15 Commander2 Strobe 15 cd GES24-15/75 Commander2 Strobe 15/75cd GES24-30 Commander2 Strobe 30 cd GES24-60 Commander2 Strobe 60 cd GES24-75 Commander2 Strobe 75 cd...

  • Page 38: System Sensor

    MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual 6.4 System Sensor System Sensor Model numbers that are followed by a “W” designate the white version of the Horn/ Strobe, Strobe, or Horn. Current Draw @ 24VDC Model Description Audible Visual P2415* Horn/Strobe P241575* Horn/Strobe P2475*...
  • Page 39 No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron. Canada Secutron Inc. 60 Industrial Parkway...
  • Page 40 MR-2100/2200 Fire Alarm Control Unit ROGRAMMING ANUAL Revision D Document #: LT-2001 WARNING: This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
  • Page 41 Mircom Technologies Limited. Mircom Technologies Limited. 25 Interchange Way Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3 Please call us at 1-888-660-4655 if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the Secutron web site: www.mircom.com.
  • Page 42 Cautions and Warnings READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depends upon proper installation. DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED. Upon unpacking your equipment, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage.
  • Page 43 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Contents 1.0 Operation and Programming Concepts ....................1 1.1 Introduction ............................. 1 1.2 General Information ........................1 1.3 Addressable Devices ........................2 1.5 Resetting 4-Wire Detectors......................5 2.0 Editing NP Databases ..........................6 2.1 Introduction ............................. 6 2.2 General Comments.........................
  • Page 44 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual...
  • Page 45 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual List of Figures Figure 1: Four Wire Device Wiring (Typical)....................5 Figure 2: Network Plus System Window ......................7 Figure 3: Switches Window ..........................11 Figure 4: Groups Window..........................13 Figure 5: Panel Window ..........................14 Figure 6: Annunciator Panel Window ......................17 Figure 7: Panel Outputs..........................
  • Page 46 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual...

  • Page 47: General Information

    MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual 1.0 Operation and Programming Concepts 1.1 Introduction This chapter provides an overview of the MR-2100/2200’s (hereafter called the MR-2200) features and supported devices. 1.2 General Information Warnings: Before Programming 1. All applicable codes and standards should be considered when programming the Control Unit.
  • Page 48 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual The basic layout of the network is a single loop (see Figure 1). Each panel and annunciator has a unique ID. There is no requirement that the IDs be sequential or that they start with 1. The master panel can be any fire panel in the network.
  • Page 49 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Network Verify Network Verify is an active process in which each panel and annunciator checks to make sure that all other panels can communicate with it. This requires that ALL PANELS in the network have same operating software and database.
  • Page 50 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual broadcast to panel 3, but panel 3 will not pass the broadcast on to panel 5 since it is supposed to be communicating to panel 4. M R 2 9 4 4 M R 2 2 0 0...
  • Page 51 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual MRI-1251 Ionization type smoke detector, low profile MRI-1551 Ionization type smoke detector MRI-2251 Photoelectric type smoke detector, low profile MRI-2551 Photoelectric type smoke detector MRI-2251T Photoelectric type smoke detector c/w heat detector, low profile MRI-2551TH Photoelectric type smoke detector c/w heat...
  • Page 52 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual MRI-B501BH Sounder base for all sensors MRI-B524BI Isolator base for MRI-x551 sensors MRI-B224BI Isolator base for MRI-x251 sensors, low profile MRI-B524RB Relay base for MRI-x551 sensors MRI-B224RB Relay base for MRx251 sensors, low profile The sensor LED activates the relay and sounder bases. When this LED stays on for more than 10 seconds, the base activates.
  • Page 53 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Device Faults The following troubles (with condition code letter) can be reported by or for addressable devices: • Missing (M): A device listed in the database is not reporting back when polled by the panel. For a new installation, this is generally indicative of devices that have been mis- addressed.
  • Page 54 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual 1.5 Resetting 4-Wire Detectors General 4-wire detectors can be reset by using one of the function relays on the panel. The relay is not programmed for any use, that is, it is unassigned. The next requirement is that a non-zero duration be programmed for it (see Section 2.5.1).
  • Page 55 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual 2.0 Editing MHINP Databases 2.1 Introduction This chapter describes the windows used to program the system. 2.2 General Comments Overview The editing of a system is done through a series of input windows. Editing starts with the System Level and progresses to the Panel Level, then to the Input Level, and finally to the Relate Level.
  • Page 56 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual included. This annunciator has two communications ports. This allows the annunciator to reside in the network loop. It uses the MR-2910 Network Board.
  • Page 57 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual 2.3 System Window Description The System Window (see Figure 5) allows editing of all system level options, as well as detailing other system wide information. The Title Bar of the window shows whether editing or viewing of the database is being preformed and the name of the current database.
  • Page 58 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual number, are activated in Alert mode. This sequence is repeated until all bells are in Evacuation mode. When the highest numbered bell circuit switches to Evacuation mode, all bell and strobe circuits on the panel will be turned on in Evacuation mode. For example, if the alarm activates Bells 1 and 4, after the NAK timeout, Bells 1 and 4 are switched to Evacuation mode and Bells 2 and 5 are set to Alert mode.
  • Page 59 System Banner The System Banner is a 20 character message that is used as a banner for the Main Menu of the LCD. The default banner is “Modul-R by Secutron”. Enforce Local LED Rules The Enforce Local LED Rules check box forces an LED on an input's panel be related. Normally an LED anywhere in the system is all that is required.
  • Page 60 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Alarm List Mode Alarm List Mode sets the way the Alarm List messages are displayed on fire panels in the system. Annunciators always receive messages as marked in the database. There are three modes of displaying messages: •...
  • Page 61 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual 2.4 Switches Window Overview The Switches Window (see Figure 6) allows for the setting of the On/Off (Day/Night) switches. There are 16 system wide switches available. All panels in the network keep track of their portion of the devices related to each switch. Relays, LEDs and control modules follow the On/Off state of the switch they are related to.
  • Page 62 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Start Mode - On The Start Mode - On check box determines if the first time listed should turn the switch On or Off. If it is not checked, the first time turns the switch off. If it is checked, the first time turns the switch on.
  • Page 63 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual 2.5 Groups Window Overview The Groups Window (see Figure 7) is used for creating and editing the Groups of relates. The Title Bar shows the current group. This dialog allows you to setup "Groups" which are composed of a text description/message and relates.
  • Page 64 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Pushbuttons The following push buttons are defined: • Exit: Close the Groups Window and return to the previous window. • Add Group: This defines a new group ID. The new group can have any number between 1 and 250. By default, the number is the next one available. There is no need for the groups to be sequentially numbered or to start at 1.
  • Page 65 The Mode list-box allows you to select the circuit type for the addressable (SLC) circuits. Choices are 2 Class B (Style 4) Circuits or 2 Class A (Style 6) Circuits for the MR-2200 and 1 Class B (Style 4) Circuit or 1 Class A (style 6) Circuit for the MR-2100. Outputs The Outputs area lists the function of the outputs of the panel.
  • Page 66 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Options The Options button displays the Options Dialog. This allows for the programming of the various panel options, such as Hot Keys, bell timers, etc. LED Annunciator Connect The LED Annunciator Connect is marked by default (to enable the main display). You can select the number of LEDs, up to 72 LED zones, which are considered an extension of the panel itself.

  • Page 67: Annunciators Window

    MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual 2.7 Annunciators Window Overview Annunciators have the following unique controls for programming (see Figure 9). Figure 9: Annunciator Panel Window LCD Check Box The LCD check box is located immediately left of the buttons. It indicates whether or not the annunciator has an optional alpha-numeric LCD.

  • Page 68: Outputs Dialog

    MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Interpreting Flashing LEDs The LEDs have the following meaning when flashing: Zone n alarm: Acknowledge available Zone n+2 alarm: 2nd Stage Inhibit available Zone n supervisory: Reset available (green) Zone n+2 supervisory: Future use Zone n trouble: Reset available (yellow)
  • Page 69 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Outputs The Outputs section is a list box that is used to select the output to program. Once the output is selected, it is programmable for the following output types: • Bell: This is a standard signalling circuit. It does not sound codes.

  • Page 70: Options Dialog

    MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual 2.9 Options Dialog Overview The Options Dialog (see Figure 11) allows for the programming of the panel and annunciator options. These settings affect the current panel only. Figure 11: Options Dialog Buzzer Mode Buzzer Mode sets when the panel buzzer sounds. Normal causes the buzzer to sound for new supervisory and trouble conditions.
  • Page 71 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual AC Fail The AC Fail is the delay before the panel reports that it has lost AC power. The panel itself goes into AC Fail mode to conserve power immediately upon losing AC. This delay is the length of time before the panel generates the trouble condition.
  • Page 72 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Hot Keys Hot Keys are a set of drop down boxes that allow you to set the functions of the operator keys on the front of the panel. There are 8 keys, each with red and green LED (some keys may have yellow instead of red LEDs).
  • Page 73 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual The keys and their functions are as follows: Action Acknowledge Silences the buzzer and acknowledges new troubles and alarms. If the buzzer is on, Acknowledge will silence it. If the buzzer is not on, any flashing LEDs will become steady.
  • Page 74 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Action Relay Causes the function relays and control modules to ignore any new alarms. Press Disconnect again to restore normal operation. The red LED will flash while active. If no relays nor control modules can be disconnected, Relay Disconnect will do nothing. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.
  • Page 75 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Action Manual This will cause the programmed control modules to reset after the system has been Restart reset in general. This is an MEA (New York City) requirement. Dialer Settings The Dialer Settings dialog (see Figure 10) allows for the programming of various communications options.
  • Page 76 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Dialer Configuration 1 The Dialer Configuration 1 dialog (see Figure contains First Communicator Options, Second Communicator Options and International Options. The Communications option determines if the dialer will communicate to the central station. When Enabled is selected,...
  • Page 77 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual of dial tone. When Disabled is selected, the panel will not dial the programmed telephone number if dial tone is not present. When the Busy Tone Detection option is enabled, if busy tone is detected, the dialer will disengage the phone line and try to place the call again following the delay between dialing attempts.
  • Page 78 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Call Directions The Call Directions dialog (see Figure 16) contains the options that determine which telephone numbers will used communicate events. There are five different types of events that can each be sent to telephone number one or telephone number two.
  • Page 79 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Dialer Maintenance and Common Reporting Codes The Dialer Maintenance and Common Reporting Codes dialog (see Figure 18) contains maintenance common reporting codes that the dialer will use to communicate those events. The Reporting Codes List is a list of all available maintenance and common reporting codes.
  • Page 80 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Figure 20: Devices Window Circuit List The Circuit List is located in the top left corner of the window. It is shown on the Circuits Window only. This lists any defined circuits for the current panel. Each circuit shows the circuit number, type of circuit and function if applicable.
  • Page 81 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual • Control (Bell): This programs the MRI-M500S as a standard signalling circuit. It will turn on continuously when activated by an alarm. They will silence when the Signal Silence button is pressed. It does not sound codes.
  • Page 82 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Use Grp Message The Use Grp Msg check box is used if the input point is to use a group message. A text entry box appears when the box is checked. Enter the ID of the group message to be used. Only one ID can be entered.
  • Page 83 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual current circuit/device. Note: Not all inputs can be copied to all other possible inputs. Marking Transfer Relates copies the relates from the listed circuit/device relates to the current one. This may cause some invalid relates. Marking Transfer Message causes the message to be copied.
  • Page 84 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual 2.11 Internal Circuits Window Overview The Internal Circuits Window (see Figure 22) allows for the programming of outputs, LEDs, etc. for the various internal circuits (functions) of the Control Panel. Internal circuits 0, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 81 and 82 are fire alarm functions while all others are trouble functions.
  • Page 85 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Pushbuttons The following push buttons are available: • List Entries: This new feature allows the user to control the information displayed. Relevant only lists items applicable to the current version only. All lists all possible items so that relates made on previous versions may be removed.
  • Page 86 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Groups Groups is a comma separated list of all the groups that the point is to use for relates. Up to ten groups can be listed. These groups are assigned to the point itself and does not change as the current output panel changes.
  • Page 87 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Msg Receive Check Box The Msg Receive check box is an option for annunciators with LCDs only. If marked, this annunciator receives messages about this input point to display in its Alarm List. If not marked, the annunciator does not receive messages about this input point to display in its Alarm List.
  • Page 88 Level 2 allows programming of almost all system parameters. (Note that a Service Mode Trouble occurs when logged in Level 2.) Higher Privilege Levels are reserved for Secutron's own use and are not discussed here. Certain functions can be assigned to different privilege levels. These functions default to the higher of the two privilege levels.
  • Page 89 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Figure 25: Selector Screen For all screens, <Clear> returns to the previous menu level without changing any information and <Home> returns to the Main Menu without changing any information. 3.3 Menus Clock Menu This menu has the following options: •...
  • Page 90 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual • Individual: View or change the status of an individual switch. Each switch is shown in turn. If a switch has no timer, the Auto option is not shown. • All Off: Force switches into the Off mode. The number displayed is the number of timers that are switched On.
  • Page 91 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual entering any number to view the first detector in the database. Each detector is displayed in turn, showing the current sensitivity and allowing for it to be changed or the next detector to be displayed. Press <Clear> to stop viewing the detector list.
  • Page 92 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Archive This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. View and change the settings for the recording of optional entries into the history. The following items can be included or not included in the history: • Test: View or change whether Test signals should be recorded in the history. The current setting is shown in the upper right corner.
  • Page 93 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual recommended rates are: 4800, 2400, and 1200. Below is a table documenting the maximum wire capacitance allowed on a single port connection. Baud Rate Maximum Capacitance 9600 100 nF 4800 220 nF 2400 470 nF 1200 680 nF •...
  • Page 94 There is a special Level 2 passcode that is variable from day to day. It can be obtained from Secutron if the Level 2 passcode is forgotten. Memory This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. This menu has the following options: •...
  • Page 95 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual 4.0 Appendix A: Condition Codes and Zone Numbers 4.1 Introduction This appendix lists the condition codes and zone numbers used by the panel. 4.2 List of Codes and Zone Numbers Condition Codes The alarm list and archive use the following formats for condition codes.
  • Page 96 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Zone Number PPP:ZZ.SSS Format: Control Panel Number Panel Zone Panel Panel Description Description Zone Zone General Alarm 1st Stage Alarm Initiating Circuit 1 2nd Stage Alarm Initiating Circuit 2 Switch Network Verify Test Mode Comlink 1 Erase Configuration...
  • Page 97 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Sub-Zone Number Zone Meaning of SubZone Number Addressable Circuit 000 - Wiring Fault All Others - Device Number Comlink 1 (Zone 51) Unit Network ID number Comlink 3 (Zone 53) Unit ID number Comlink 6 (Zone 54)
  • Page 98 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Zone Meaning of SubZone Number Hot Key Activation (Zone 90): 001 - Fire Drill Function Number of the Hot key 002 - Lamp Test pressed 004 - Relay Disconnect 005 - Test Mode 006 - Signal Disconnect...
  • Page 99 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Zone Meaning of SubZone Number Hot Key Activation (Zone 90): 019 - Switch 4 On Function Number of the Hot key 020 - Switch 5 On pressed 021 - Switch 6 On 022 - Switch 7 On...
  • Page 100 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Zone Meaning of SubZone Number Network Reboot Required Who Unit ID of panel generating the Network Reboot (Zone 94): Required trouble Network Reboot Required Why 001 - network (Zone 95) 002 - network 003 - port 3...
  • Page 101 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual 5.0 Appendix B: Stand-by Battery Calculation Batteries are designed and manufactured for a specific use. "Standby" is one of these uses. They are rated according to their ability to deliver a steady current for 20 hours ("20 Hour Rating"). A 10 Ah battery is unable to deliver 10 A for 1 hour, however it delivers ½...
  • Page 102 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual 6.0 Appendix C: Service Terminal 6.1 General The MR-2200 Control Unit displays information and accept commands via the service terminal port. The information includes initiating circuit configuration, current status of bell, relays, etc., diagnostic information, the archive, etc. The commands allow for the selection of the information to view, limited programming and basic operation.
  • Page 103 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Screen Name Description Bells Displays the current status of the bell circuits. Also shows the timers and settings for the cut-off. See screen 11 for acceptable supervision values. Function Relays Displays the current settings and timers for the 4 function relays.
  • Page 104 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Screen Name Description Printer A copy of everything sent to the printer. This is useful for capturing print-outs to a file. Note: Status line updating is disabled while on this screen. Printer Status Displays the current printer status.
  • Page 105 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Screen Name Description FIFO This screen is restricted to Privilege Level 1 and above. Displays the FIFO memory usage of various system tasks. This diagnostic screen needs to be consulted if the panel has a Memory Overflow trouble. The first line shows the total FIFO space and the largest amount any one task has used.
  • Page 106 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Screen Name Description Type Assigned For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying all the devices that are programmed to be on the circuit. Commands Display next device Display selected device at address (address)A Reset Minimum/Maximum Values...
  • Page 107 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Screen Name Description Control Modules For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying the current status of all the Control modules. Commands Display next device Display selected device at address (address)A Reset Minimum/Maximum Values Energize both sets of terminals...
  • Page 108 MR-2100/2200 Programming Manual Command Description 0-127<Tab> View Selected Screen. If selected screen is unused/ unavailable, the next available screen is shown. 0.0<Tab> TeleVideo cursor control mode. 0.1<Tab> VT100 cursor control mode. Silence buzzer. Print the date and time. (month).(date) D Enter the date.
  • Page 109 No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron. Canada U.S.A 25 Interchange Way...
  • Page 110 MR-2100/2200 Fire Alarm Control Unit PERATOR’S ANUAL Revision C Document #: LT-2002 WARNING: This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
  • Page 111 Secutron Inc. Secutron Inc. 25 Interchange Way Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3 Please call us at 1-888-695-3545 if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
  • Page 112 MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual Contents 1.0 Unit Operation ............................1 1.1 Power Up Sequence ........................1 1.2 Types of Inputs ..........................1 1.3 Status Display ..........................1 1.4 Zone LEDs ............................2 1.5 Buzzer............................. 2 1.6 Operator Keys..........................2 1.7 Alarm List ............................5 1.8 LCD and Keypad..........................
  • Page 113 MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual...
  • Page 114 MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual 1.0 Unit Operation 1.1 Power Up Sequence The power up sequence of the MR 2100/2200 (hereafter referred to as the MR 2200) panel is started in the following ways: power is applied to the panel; the hard reboot button at the top of the main board is pressed;...
  • Page 115 MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual 1.3 Status Display The status display is located in the middle of the main display. It consists of 8 LEDs. The alarm (red), supervisory (yellow), trouble (yellow), ground fault (yellow), and NAC trouble (yellow) LEDs will flash for any new condition and will be latched by the Acknowledge key. The AC LED (green) will be on while the panel has AC power applied to it.
  • Page 116 MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual 1.6 Operator Keys There are 8 operator keys. In the figure below, the keys are located on the lower left and are labelled “System Controls” The LEDs associated with these keys are used to display function status. The top three keys (Acknowledge, Signal Silence, and System Reset) are not user- assignable.
  • Page 117 MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual Action System System Reset resets part or all of the system. Reset • The rightmost green LED flashes when the system, or part of the system, can be reset. • The leftmost green LED flashes if the ground fault relay is activated.
  • Page 118 MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual Action Common This function is configurable. It can be programmed to disable the relays or to Disconnect disable a City Tie module (MRCTYB). When an MRCTYB module is disconnected, a trouble will be reported to the city and then any subsequent signals will not be reported until the card is re-enabled.
  • Page 119 MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual the First or Last entry. Once viewing the events, one can look at the next one using the <Right Arrow> or the previous one with the <Left Arrow>. <Enter> will act as either <Left Arrow> or <Right Arrow>, whichever was pressed last. <Up Arrow> and <Down Arrow> will rotate between pages of the event.
  • Page 120 MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual The Main Menu has the following selections: Status: Displays the current status of various parts of the panel. The following options are available: More: Displays the next screen of menu options. When the last screen of the menu is displayed the next screen will be the first one again.
  • Page 121 MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual of occurrence for events occurring at or to the panel. There may be a second screen including information from the database. You can start by looking at either the last event (newest) or the first event (oldest). When viewing the events, scroll to the next one using the <Right Arrow> or the previous one with the <Left Arrow>.
  • Page 122 MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual 2.0 Supplementary Information 2.1 Condition Codes and Zone Numbers The History and Archive use the following formats for condition codes and zone numbering. Condition Code Archive Alarm List Description ALARM Alarm bypass Bypass Comlink dupl Duplicate Addressable Device...
  • Page 123 MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual Notes: 1. These zones do not restore. 2. Privilege Level 0 generates a restore signal; all others generate a trouble signal. 3. This zone does not restore and is not repeated sequentially in the archive. Sub-Zone Number...
  • Page 124 MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual 2.2 Miscellaneous Troubles This is a list of all possible messages that can be displayed by Miscellaneous Trouble on the LCD. Only those conditions that are in trouble will be shown. Some of the messages are always displayed if the panel is in Test Mode.
  • Page 125 MR-2100/2200 Operator’s Manual Message Description List the status of the 8 bell circuits and the 2 auxiliary power circuits. BBBBBBAA Each column represents one circuit. A dot (.) indicates a normal 1234567812 condition, an S indicates a short, an O indicates an open and a G indicates a ground.
  • Page 126 The extended memory lockout has timed out. The panel will need a memory lockout Hard Reboot to correct this problem. Please notify Secutron of the occurrence of this error. Include in your report the panel serial number and the name, date and time of the operating program.
  • Page 127 No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron. Canada Secutron Inc. 60 Industrial Parkway...
  • Page 128 CAUTION: DISCONNECT ALL SOURCES OF POWER PRIOR TO SERVICING OR ELECTRIC SHOCK MAY RESULT. The AC disconnect is located at: ____________________________________________ FRAME AND MOUNT THESE INSTRUCTIONS ADJACENT TO THE PANEL © 2004 Secutron Inc., Vaughan, Ontario L4K 5W3 Canada LT-2003 Rev. A...
  • Page 129 ACKNOWLEDGE again. • To reset the system once the cause of the supervisory condition has been corrected, press SYSTEM RESET. FRAME AND MOUNT THESE INSTRUCTIONS ADJACENT TO THE PANEL © 2004 Secutron Inc., Vaughan, Ontario L4K 5W3 Canada LT-2004 Rev. A...
  • Page 130 M R - 2 4 0 0 Fire Alarm Control Unit NSTALLATION ANUAL Revision E Document #: LT-2005 WARNING: This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
  • Page 131 Secutron Inc. Secutron Inc. 25 Interchange Way Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3 Please call us at 1-888-SECUTRON (1-888-732-8876) if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
  • Page 132 Cautions and Warnings READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depends upon proper installation. DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED. Upon unpacking your equipment, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage.
  • Page 133 HS-3400 Installation Manual Contents 1.0 Technical Information..........................1 1.1 General.............................. 1 1.2 Main Circuit Board ..........................1 1.3 Front Panel ............................2 1.4 Input Circuits............................2 1.5 Output Circuits........................... 2 1.6 Power Supply ............................ 3 1.7 Enclosure............................3 2.0 Installation ..............................4 2.1 Mounting and Assembling Unit......................
  • Page 134 HS-3400 Installation Manual...
  • Page 135 HS-3400 Installation Manual List Of Figures And Tables Figures Figure 1: Exploded View ..........................4 Figure 2: Knockouts ............................5 Figure 3: Style 6 (Class A) ..........................5 Figure 4: Style 4 (Class B) Wiring ........................6 Figure 5: M500M Wiring..........................7 Figure 6: M501M Wiring..........................
  • Page 136 HS-3400 Installation Manual...
  • Page 137 MR-2400 Installation Manual 1.0 Technical Information 1.1 General The MR-2400 Fire Alarm Control Unit provides capability for up to 4 Input Circuits, 6 Polarity Reversing Bell Circuits, 2 General Purpose Form "C" Relays and 2 auxiliary power outputs as well as system operated relays for alarm and trouble indication.

  • Page 138: Front Panel

    MR-2400 Installation Manual 1.3 Front Panel The system controls consist of 10 system switches, position alpha-numeric SCROLL keypad, and a Scroll Button. The 10 system switches are factory defined for operations such general evacuation, alarm acknowledge, signal silence and system reset.

  • Page 139: Power Supply

    MR-2400 Installation Manual will toggle for duration time when the Reset key is pressed. A duration time of zero will disable this feature. The auxiliary power circuits are rated for 24 VDC @ 150 mA. They are supervised for shorts. Any load placed on the auxiliary power circuits must be included when calculating stand-by battery requirements.

  • Page 140: Mounting And Assembling Unit

    MR-2400 Installation Manual 2.0 Installation 2.1 Mounting and Assembling Unit The Control Unit is shipped in two sections: the Cabinet complete with Door, Main Board Assembly, Power Supply Toroidal Transformer; and the Battery Pack. The Main Board Assembly needs no field assembly work. Figure 1 shows an exploded view of the unit (door not shown).
  • Page 141 Wire capacitance and resistance will affect the allowable wire length. Consult Secutron's Applications Department for specific requirements. Devices will be connected as in Figure 3. Use only approved devices. The return wiring must be in a separate conduit. Figure 3: Style 6 (Class A)
  • Page 142 Table 1. Wire capacitance and resistance will affect the allowable wire length. The recommended wiring is unshielded twisted pair. Consult Secutron's Applications Department for specific requirements. Devices will be connected as in Figure 4. Use only approved devices.
  • Page 143 MR-2400 Installation Manual Addressable Modules The addressable module extended circuits are wired as shown in the following Figures. Figure 5: MRI-M500M Wiring Figure 6: MRI-M501M Wiring Figure 7: MRI-M502M Wiring Figure 8: MRI-M500S Wiring For Signalling Circuits...
  • Page 144 MR-2400 Installation Manual Figure 9: MRI-M500R Wiring Form C Relay Use Figure 10: MRI-M500X Wiring Style Z (Class A) Bell Circuit This is a 4 wire Style Z (Class A) signalling (notification appliance) circuit. Devices will be connected as in Figure 11.
  • Page 145 MR-2400 Installation Manual Style Y (Class B) Bell Circuit This is a 2 wire Style Y (Class B) signalling (notification appliance) circuit. Devices and the 10 kΩ end-of-line resister will be connected as in Figure 12. Maximum wire lengths are shown in Table 2. Use only approved devices.
  • Page 146 MR-2400 Installation Manual AC Power Connections The Main Control Unit requires an AC power supply. This supply is connected as shown in Figure 15. The batteries forming the Battery Pack are wired in series. The Battery Pack attaches to the two wires coming from the Power Supply Board, the black wire to the black (negative) terminal and the red wire to the red (positive) terminal.
  • Page 147 MR-2400 Installation Manual MR-2944 Annunciator The MR-2944 Annunciator is connected to the panel by 4 wires, 2 for communications and 2 for power. The communications wiring is polarity sensitive. Wiring is done as shown in Figure 18. More than one MR-2944 annunciator can be connected to the panel.
  • Page 148 MR-2400 Installation Manual 3.0 Technical Specifications Power Line 120 VAC, 300 VA (nominal) Standby 24 VDC, 100 mA (nominal) Alarm plus Bell/Releasing Circuits Brown Out Voltage 93 VAC (typical) normal standby 95 VAC (typical) alarm Battery Charger 2.3 A maximum charging current Battery Type Sealed lead acid, up to 48 Ah, 24 V (UL listed up to 38Ah) Input (Initiating Device) Circuits (4)
  • Page 149 MR-2400 Installation Manual MR-2109-X Communication Boards MR-2109-2 MR-2109-4 Transmission Type Opto-coupled RS-232 Wire Type Twisted Pair Twisted Pair Wire Gauge 18-22 AWG 18-22 AWG Distance 10 km (approximately) 10-20 m Application MR-2944 Computer connection Circuit No. of Class Style (NFPA-72A) End of Line Description Devices...

  • Page 150: Parts List

    MR-2400 Installation Manual 4.0 Parts List Model Description Basic Control Unit MR-2400 Basic Control Unit, 2 Class A Circuits Packages HS-3400B Basic Control Unit, 2 Class B Circuits Optional Modules MR-2109-2 Opto-Coupled Party Line Driver for connection to MR-2944 or SE 2000 MR-2109-4 RS-232 Line Driver for computer connection...
  • Page 151 MR-2400 Installation Manual 5.0 Appendix A: Stand-by Battery Calculation Batteries are designed and manufactured for a specific use. "Standby" is one of these uses. They are rated according to their ability to deliver a steady current for 20 hours ("20 Hour Rating"). A 10 Ah battery is unable to deliver 10 A for 1 hour, however it will deliver ½...
  • Page 152 MR-2400 Installation Manual 5.1 Battery Calculations Job: ___________________________________Date: _________ Total Power = Draw x Quantity x Time For Panels and Input Devices: Time = Standby Time + Alarm Time = _____ + _____ = _______ Panel/Device Draw (mA) Quantity Total Power (Ah) MR-2400 MRI-1551/2551/5551 Detectors 0.20...

  • Page 153: Appendix B: Ul Listed Compatible Devices

    MR-2400 Installation Manual 6.0 Appendix B: UL Listed Compatible Devices 6.1 Notification Appliances The following notification appliances, where a current rating is shown, may be used with the MR-2400 Control Units. Wheelock Current Draw @24 VDC Model Type Audible Visual MT-12/24-R Multi tone Horn 48 (Hi), 26 (Lo)
  • Page 154 MR-2400 Installation Manual Current Draw @24 VDC Model Type Audible Visual WST-24-FR Strobe WS1T-24-FR Strobe WS3T-24-FR Strobe WHT-24-FR Strobe WH1T-24-FR Strobe WH3T-24-FR Strobe WMT-24-FR Strobe WM1T-24-FR Strobe WM3T-24-FR Strobe VLPM-24-W-VF-R Strobe 34T-24-R Horn 7001T-24-W-FR Strobe Horn 63 (combined) 7002T-24-W-FR Strobe Horn 63 (combined) V7001T-24-W-FR Strobe Horn...
  • Page 155 MR-2400 Installation Manual Current Draw @24 VDC Model Type Audible Visual 46T-G10-24-R Vibrating Bell, 10 in. 46T-G6-24-WS-24-HF-R Strobe Bell, 6 in. 46T-G10-24-WS-24-HF-R Strobe Bell, 10 in. 46T-G6-24-WH-24-HF-R Strobe Bell, 6 in. 46T-G10-24-WH-24-HF-R Strobe Bell, 10 in. E-7025-WS-24-VF-R Strobe Speaker E-7025-WS-24-VF-W Strobe Speaker E-7070-WS-24-VF-R Strobe Speaker...
  • Page 156 MR-2400 Installation Manual Current Draw @24 VDC Model Type Audible Visual AH-24 Mini Horn, indoor AH-24WP Mini Horn, indoor/outdoor AS-2415W Audible Strobe 92 (combined) AS-241575W Audible Strobe 107 (combined) AS-2430W Audible Strobe 126 (combined) AS-2475W Audible Strobe 186 (combined) AS-24110W Audible Strobe 213 (combined) AS-2415C...
  • Page 157 MR-2400 Installation Manual Current Draw @24 VDC Model Type Audible Visual MT4-24-LSM Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync MT4 -24- MS Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync MT4-24-IS Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync MT4-24-SL Multitone Strobe Signal, sync MT4-24-SLM Multitone Strobe Signal, sync AMT-12/24 Mini Horn AMT4-l2/24...
  • Page 158 MR-2400 Installation Manual Current Draw @24 VDC Model Type Audible Visual CH70-24110W Strobe Chime CH90-2415W Strobe Chime CH90-241575W Strobe Chime CH90-2430W Strobe Chime CH90-2475W Strobe Chime CH90-24110W Strobe Chime CH70-2415C Strobe Chime CH70-2430C Strobe Chime CH70-2475C Strobe Chime CH70-24100C Strobe Chime CH90-2415C Strobe Chime CH90-2430C...
  • Page 159 MR-2400 Installation Manual Current Draw @24 VDC Model Type Audible Visual ET70 -2475W Strobe Speaker ET70-24110W Strobe Speaker ET90-2415W Strobe Speaker ET90-241575W Strobe Speaker ET90-24 30W Strobe Speaker ET90-2475W Strobe Speaker ET90-24110W Strobe Speaker ET90-2415C Strobe Speaker ET90-2430C Strobe Speaker ET90-2475C Strobe Speaker ET90-24100C...
  • Page 160 MR-2400 Installation Manual Current Draw @24 VDC Model Type Audible Visual E90 -2475W Strobe Speaker E90-24110W Strobe Speaker E90 -2415C Strobe Speaker E90 -2430C Strobe Speaker E90 -2475C Strobe speaker E90 -24100C Strobe Speaker SM -12/24 Sync Module 25 (combined) DSM -12/24 Dual Sync Module 38 (combined)
  • Page 161 MR-2400 Installation Manual Gentex Current Draw @24 VDC Model Type Audible Visual GEH24 Commander2 Horn GES24-15 Commander2 Strobe 15 cd GES24-15/75 Commander2 Strobe 15/75cd GES24-30 Commander2 Strobe 30 cd GES24-60 Commander2 Strobe 60 cd GES24-75 Commander2 Strobe 75 cd GES24-110 Commander2 Strobe 110 cd GEC24-15 Commander2 Horn/Strobe 15 cd...
  • Page 162 MR-2400 Installation Manual Current Draw @24 VDC Model Type Audible Visual GXS-4-15/75-W Strobe 15/75 Cd Wall GXS-4-15/75-C Strobe 15/75 Cd Ceiling GXS-4-15/75-Z Strobe 15/75 Cd Sync GXS-4-30 Strobe 30 Cd GXS-4-30/75 Strobe 30/75 Cd GXS-4-60 Strobe 60 Cd GXS-4-110 Strobe 110 Cd HG124 Electronic Horn 12 or 24 Vdc SHG24-15...
  • Page 163 MR-2400 Installation Manual Current Draw @24 VDC Model Type Audible Visual ST24-60 Commander Strobe 60 cd ST24-75 Commander Strobe 75 cd ST24-110 Commander Strobe 110 cd HS24-15 Commander Horn/Strobe 15 cd 75 (combined) HS24-15/75 Commander Horn/Strobe 15/75 cd 87 (combined) HS24-30 Commander Horn/Strobe 30 cd 87 (combined)
  • Page 164 MR-2400 Installation Manual System Sensor Current Draw @24 VDC Model Type Audible Visual P2415 (R) (W) Horn/Strobe P241575 (R) (W) Horn/Strobe P2475 (R) (W) Horn/Strobe P24110 (R) (W) Horn/Strobe P241575K Horn/Strobe P2475K Horn/Strobe P24110K Horn/Strobe P241575F Horn/Strobe S2415 (R) (W) Strobe S241575 (R) (W) Strobe...
  • Page 165 MR-2400 Installation Manual Current Draw @24 VDC Model Type Audible Visual MASS24MC Electronic Sounder/Strobe PA400R (R) (W) (B) Sounder PA400RF (R) (W) Sounder PS24LO (R) (W) (B) add on Strobe SS2415ADA (R) (B) Strobe SS241575ADA (R) Strobe SS2475ADA (R) (B) Strobe SS24110ADA (R) (B) Strobe...
  • Page 166 99 detectors and 99 monitor/control modules may be connected to each addressable communications circuit. Refer to the installation instructions which accompany each device for details of installation wiring and proper application. Installation Manufacturer Model Type Instructions Secutron MRI-1251 Ionization type smoke detector D200-51-00 MRI-1251B Ionization type smoke detector D200-28-00 MRI-2251...
  • Page 167 MR-2400 Installation Manual Installation Manufacturer Model Type Instructions System 2551TH Photoelectric type smoke detector w/ ther- D500-04-00 Sensor mal element (cont’d) 3251 Combination smoke detector and thermo- D200-57-00 stat 5251P Thermostat D200-88-00 5251B Thermostat D200-30-00 5251RP Thermostat w/ Rate of Rise D200-89-00 5251RB Thermostat w/ Rate of Rise...

  • Page 168: Appendix C: Interconnection To Other Equipment

    MR-2400 Installation Manual 7.0 Appendix C: Interconnection To Other Equipment 7.1 Radionics 2071C and 2071AC The wiring between the MR-2400 and the Radionics 2071C and 2071AC Dialers is as shown in the following diagram: An addressable module may be substituted as follows for the alarm contacts: to MR-2900 2071C/AC MRI-500R...
  • Page 169 MR-2400 Installation Manual 7.2 Silent Knight 5104 The wiring between the MR-2400 and the Silent Knight 5104 dialer is as shown in the following diagram: An addressable module may be substituted as follows for alarm contacts only: to FACP MRI-500R 5104 Trouble contacts must be connected to the panel.
  • Page 170 MR-2400 Installation Manual 7.3 CTM City Tie Module The CTM is designed to interface between a control panel and a local city tie box. The interface from the control panel is via a 24VDC signal circuit. This module is intended for connection to the control unit at the protected premises.
  • Page 171 MR-2400 Installation Manual 7.4 Keltron 3158 TTM The Keltron 3158 TTM and the MR-2400 are wired together as shown below: Addressable control modules cannot be used with the Keltron 3158 TTM. Note: The Keltron 3158 TTM is separately listed equipment. Refer to the installation and wiring instructions provided with the unit.
  • Page 172 MR-2400 Installation Manual Warranty & Warning Information Warning Please Read Carefully Note to End Users: This equipment is subject to terms and conditions of sale as follows: Note to Installers This warning contains vital information. As the only individual in contact with system users, it is your responsibility to bring each item in this warning to the attention of the users of this system.

  • Page 173: Limited Warranty

    During the warranty period, Secutron Inc. shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials. Any replacement and/or repaired parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer.
  • Page 174 Products which Secutron Inc. determines to be repairable will be repaired and returned. A set fee which Secutron Inc. has predetermined and which may be revised from time to time, will be charged for each unit repaired. Products which Secutron Inc. determines not to be repairable will be replaced by the nearest equivalent product available at that time.
  • Page 175 No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron. Canada U.S.A 25 Interchange Way...
  • Page 176 M R - 2 4 0 0 Fire Alarm Control Unit ROGRAMMING ANUAL Revision D Document #: LT-2006 WARNING: This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
  • Page 177 Secutron Inc. Secutron Inc. 25 Interchange Way Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3 Please call us at 1-888-695-3545 if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
  • Page 178 MR-2400 Programming Manual Contents 1.0 Operation and Programming Concepts ....................1 Warnings: Before programming....................... 1 1.1 General.............................. 1 1.2 Addressable Devices......................... 1 1.3 Releasing Service..........................4 1.4 Resetting 4-Wire Detectors ....................... 5 2.0 Editing MHI Databases ..........................6 2.1 General Programming Notes......................6 2.2 System Window..........................
  • Page 179 MR-2400 Programming Manual...
  • Page 180 MR-2400 Programming Manual List of Figures and Tables Figures Figure 1: 4-Wire Device Wiring (typical)......................5 Figure 2: System Window ..........................7 Figure 3: Switches Window..........................10 Figure 4: Groups Window ..........................11 Figure 5: Panel Window ..........................12 Figure 6: IDs Supervised ..........................14 Figure 7: Annunciator Panel Window......................
  • Page 181 MR-2400 Programming Manual...
  • Page 182 MR-2400 Programming Manual 1.0 Operation and Programming Concepts Warnings: Before programming 1. All applicable codes and standards should be considered when programming the Control Unit. 2. The Control Unit will continue to monitor input circuits and devices and will act according to the current program settings if an alarm is received while it is being programmed.
  • Page 183 MR-2400 Programming Manual The MRI-M500M, MRI-M500DM, MRI-M501M, MRI-M502M and MRI-M503M monitor modules all appear the same to the MR-2400. This allows for the easy substitution of devices if field requirements change. The MRI-M501M and MRI-M503M modules are intended for mounting inside the back box of a conventional contact device.
  • Page 184 MR-2400 Programming Manual FLASH. This is done through the LCD Menu by choosing PROGRAM/ADDRESSABLE/ LED MODE/FLASH. The MR-2400 will only turn on the LEDs of up to 5 devices per addressable circuit to prevent excess current flow. While the panel will continue to respond to further alarms from the circuit, the panel will not turn on additional LEDs.
  • Page 185 MR-2400 Programming Manual Class A Inputs The Class A Addressable Inputs uses two input circuits, out on the odd numbered circuit and in on the following even numbered circuit, for example: out on circuit 1 and in on circuit 2. Both circuits are powered by the panel from a single source, so that there is no internal isolation between the circuits.
  • Page 186 MR-2400 Programming Manual 1.4 Resetting 4-Wire Detectors 4-wire detectors can be reset by using one of the function relays on the panel. The relay is not programmed for any use, that is, it is unassigned. The next requirement is that a non-zero duration be programmed for it (see Section 2.5.1).
  • Page 187 MR-2400 Programming Manual 2.0 Editing MHI Databases 2.1 General Programming Notes The editing of a system is done through a series of input windows. Editing starts with the System Level and progresses to the Panel Level, then to the Input Level, and finally to the Relate Level. The Main Menu and option speed keys are not available while editing/viewing the system.
  • Page 188 MR-2400 Programming Manual • MR-2924 Annunciator: Not covered in this manual. • MR-2914 Annunciator: Not covered in this manual. Notes: 1. The MR-2614 and MR-2644 Annunciators can be attached to the MR-2400 panel. They are considered an extension of the panel by MHI and do not change how these panels interface with other annunciators.
  • Page 189 LCD except in STATUS/IDENTIFICATION. The System Banner is a 20 character message that is used as a banner for the Main Menu of the LCD. The default banner is “Modul-R by Secutron”.
  • Page 190 MR-2400 Programming Manual The Enforce Local LED Rules check box forces an LED on an input's panel be related. Normally an LED anywhere in the system is all that is required. This option will need to be unselected if the MR-2400 panel does not have any MR-2614 annunciators.
  • Page 191 MR-2400 Programming Manual 2.3 Switches Window The Switches Window (see Figure 3) allows for the setting of the On/Off (Day/ Night) switches. There are 16 system wide switches available. All panels in the network will keep track of its portion of the devices related each switch.
  • Page 192 MR-2400 Programming Manual There are five push buttons on the right side: • Exit: Close the Switches Window and return to the System Window. • Reset: This will remove all relates and all times for the currently highlighted switch. • Relate: Shows the Relate Window.
  • Page 193 MR-2400 Programming Manual check-box and specifying this Group ID. This is a powerful feature if you are defining a large number of inputs that require the same message. The following push buttons are defined: • Exit: Close the Groups Window and return to the previous window. •...
  • Page 194 MR-2400 Programming Manual • Input Circuits: Display the Circuits Window. See section 2.6. • Internal Circuits: Display the Internal Circuit Window. See section 2.7. • More Info: This displays a dialog box listing basic information about the panel including the date the database was last downloaded into a panel, the number of times downloaded, etc.
  • Page 195 MR-2400 Programming Manual automatically choose this option if any MR-2944 annunciators are included in the database. The MR2614 Connect should be marked if an MR-2614 LED Annunciator is attached. It has up to 72 LED zones which are considered an extension of the panel itself. Choose the number of LED zones using the Local Ann.
  • Page 196 MR-2400 Programming Manual The LEDs have the following meaning when flashing: Zone n alarm: Acknowledge available Zone n+2 alarm: 2nd Stage Inhibit available Zone n supervisory: Reset available (green) Zone n+2 supervisoryFuture use Zone n trouble: Reset available (yellow) Zone n+2 troubleFuture use Zone n+1 alarm: Signal Silence active Zone n+3 alarmFuture use Zone n+1 supervisory: Signal Silence...
  • Page 197 MR-2400 Programming Manual • Note: Releaser type circuits can only be activated by inputs on the same panel. • Auxiliary Power (AuxPwr): This turns on the Output continuously to supply power for auxiliary devices, such as annunciators. If a Duration time is given for the Auxiliary Power circuit, the circuit will be powered off for that number of seconds (from 1 to 30) when the panel Reset key is pressed with neither of its LEDs flashing.
  • Page 198 MR-2400 Programming Manual hours). If a time of 0 minutes is entered, the panel will use a 10 second delay. Note: Most installations will require a time of 1 minute (default) to meet required codes and standards. For panels connected to UL listed monitoring stations, normally a time of 6 to 12 hours (360 to 720 minutes) is required.
  • Page 199 MR-2400 Programming Manual condition, but not the missing device messages. Note: This feature requires that the BRK program be dated 9 September 1999 or later (version 17.20 or later). Hot Keys are a set of drop down boxes that define the functions of the operator keys on the front of the panel.
  • Page 200 MR-2400 Programming Manual Action Second Prevents the automatic operation of second stage operation. This applies only to Stage Inhibit panels with ALERT or STAGED type bell systems. For ALERT systems, pressing the Second Stage Inhibit will prevent the panel from going into second stage. For STAGED systems, it will prevent the system from going to the next stage.
  • Page 201 MR-2400 Programming Manual Action Common Disables the municipal relays from functioning. Press again to enable relays. The Disconnect red LED flashes while the relays are disabled. The municipal relays affected are programmable. If no relays are selected for disabling, Common Disconnect is unavailable.
  • Page 202 MR-2400 Programming Manual The 1 and 2 # Format setting affects the type of communication that the dialer sends to the central station. There are seven formats available including 4 BPS formats, Contact ID, SIA and a pager format. The Dialer Settings window has the following push buttons along the right side: •...
  • Page 203 MR-2400 Programming Manual The Contact ID Rep. Codes option determines whether the dialer will send the automatic reporting codes that are in the dialer, or use the reporting codes that are programmed in the Zone Data and Maintenance/Common reporting codes sections. See Appendix D for a list of the automatic Contact ID Reporting Codes.
  • Page 204 MR-2400 Programming Manual The Test Transmission Cycle determines the number of days between test transmissions The TLM Trouble Delay controls the number of telephone line monitoring checks required before a telephone line trouble is generated. The dialer checks the telephone connection at 10-second intervals.
  • Page 205 MR-2400 Programming Manual • Supervisory Restoral Reporting Code Dialer Maintenance and Common Reporting Codes The Dialer Maintenance and Common Reporting Codes dialog (see Figure 17) contains maintenance common reporting codes that the dialer will use to communicate those events. The Reporting Codes List is a list of all available maintenance and common reporting codes.
  • Page 206 MR-2400 Programming Manual Device List The Device List is located in the top left corner of the window. It is shown on the Devices Window only. lists defined addressable devices current addressable circuit. For addressable devices, the type of device and its function are shown for each one defined.
  • Page 207 MR-2400 Programming Manual Function Type Selector The Function Type Selector is used to display and edit the function of the current input point. The following function types are available: • Alarm: This is a generic fire input. Displays **ALARM** in the Alarm List when activated. •...
  • Page 208 MR-2400 Programming Manual lowest address to the highest address, at a rate set by the Fan Delay option in the Panel Options Dialog, when Reset is pressed on the panel. The operation of Control Modules (supervising) is not affected by this setting. •...
  • Page 209 MR-2400 Programming Manual copy is shown. Marking the check box in the warning will stop the box from appearing again for the database. This option can help speed up the creation of a database. By completely defining one input, these values can be copied to all other inputs, making any minor changes that are required after the copy.
  • Page 210 MR-2400 Programming Manual remote location. This circuit is not tripped by troubles generated by input circuits or addressable devices. This circuit is not recorded in the archive of the panel. The Internal Circuits List displays all of the internal circuits for the current Control Panel. Each line includes the internal circuit number, its description and if relates have been assigned.
  • Page 211 MR-2400 Programming Manual The Panel List is a list-box located in the top left corner of the window. It lists all the panels, both Control and Annunciator, that are defined in the system along with their panel message. The high- lighted entry in the list is the one that is being related to by the current input.
  • Page 212 Level 2 allows programming of almost all system parameters. Higher Privilege Levels are reserved for Secutron's own use and are not discussed here. Certain functions can be assigned to different privilege levels. These functions default to the higher of the two privilege levels.
  • Page 213 MR-2400 Programming Manual 3.2 Clock This menu has the following options: • Date: View or change the date. The date is entered in MM.DD.YY format. Each section of the date must be separated by a dot. Press <Enter> to accept date typed. <Clear> will remove any digits typed.
  • Page 214 MR-2400 Programming Manual 3.5 Addressable The menu has the following options: • Reset Max/Min: Clears the stored values for the maximum and minimum values returned by the addressable devices. These values are automatically cleared when the panel reboots. • Duplicates Check: This will cause an immediate check to see if more than one device is using an address.
  • Page 215 MR-2400 Programming Manual bypass. After the last device, display returns to the Bypass menu. Press <Clear> to return to the Bypass Menu. This option is not available if there are no devices bypassed. -- ALL OFF: Remove all bypasses, if any, from the system. The number of bypassed devices is displayed.
  • Page 216 MR-2400 Programming Manual 3.7 Archive This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. View and change the settings for the recording of optional entries into the history. The following items can be included or not included in the history: • Test: View or change whether Test signals should be recorded in the history.
  • Page 217 MR-2400 Programming Manual Table 1: Maximum Capacitance for Network Baud Rates Baud Rate Maximum Capacitance 9600 100 nF 4800 220 nF 2400 470 nF 1200 680 nF Digitel Protocol 1 (MR2-4 Program): Allows for the setting of parameters related to the connection to the SE-2000.
  • Page 218 There is a special Level 2 passcode that is variable from day to day. It can be obtained from Secutron if the Level 2 passcode is forgotten. Only MR-2614 v2.1 and up support 4800 baud. Previous versions only support 1200 baud.
  • Page 219 MR-2400 Programming Manual 3.12 Memory This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. This menu has the following options: Erase Configuration: This will erase all initiating circuit, bell, relay, releaser and privilege values entered from the LCD and keypad, and replace them with default values. This has no effect on information contained in the downloaded database.
  • Page 220 MR-2400 Programming Manual 4.0 Appendix A: Condition Codes and Zone Numbers The History and Archive use the following formats for condition codes and zone numbering. Condition Code Archive Alarm List Description ALARM Alarm bypass Bypass Comlink dupl Duplicate Addressable Device alert Maintenance Alert ground...
  • Page 221 MR-2400 Programming Manual Notes: 1. These zones do not restore. 2. Privilege Level 0 generates a restore signal; all others generate a trouble signal. 3. This zone does not restore and is not repeated sequentially in the archive. Sub-Zone Number Addressable Circuit: Device Number Comlink 6 (Zone 54): ID of MR-2614, MR-2644, MR2801-MR or MR2806-MR Addressable Module Comlink (Zone 59): Always 001...
  • Page 222 MR-2400 Programming Manual 5.0 Appendix B: Stand-by Battery Calculation Batteries are designed and manufactured for a specific use. "Standby" is one of these uses. They are rated according to their ability to deliver a steady current for 20 hours ("20 Hour Rating"). A 10 Ah battery is unable to deliver 10 A for 1 hour, however it will deliver ½...
  • Page 223 MR-2400 Programming Manual 5.1 Battery Calculations Job: ___________________________________Date: _________ Total Power = Draw x Quantity x Time For Panels and Input Devices: Time = Standby Time + Alarm Time = _____ + _____ = _______ Panel/Device Draw (mA) Quantity Total Power (Ah) MR-2400 MRI-1551/2551/5551 Detectors 0.20...
  • Page 224 MR-2400 Programming Manual 6.0 Appendix C: Service Terminal The MR-2400 Control Unit and the Addressable Input Module will display information and accept commands via the service terminal port. The information includes initiating circuit configuration, current status of bell, relays, etc., diagnostic information, the Archive, etc. The commands allow for the selection of the information to view, limited programming and basic operation.
  • Page 225 MR-2400 Programming Manual Screen Name Description Function Displays the current settings and timers for the 2 function relays. Relays Releasers Displays the current settings and timers for the releasing circuits (if any). Common Displays the current status of the 3 common system relays. Also Relays shows which relays may be disconnected by the Common Disconnect hot-key.
  • Page 226 MR-2400 Programming Manual Screen Name Description Port 3 Shows the current status, ID, frame count and baud rate for the central station communications link. A question mark will appear in front of the baud rate when the port is off-line. Commands Clear counters Port 6...
  • Page 227 MR-2400 Programming Manual Screen Name Description Tasks This screen is restricted to Privilege Level 1 and above. This screen is for factory use only. FIFO This screen is restricted to Privilege Level 1 and above. Displays the FIFO memory usage of various system tasks. This diagnostic screen needs to be consulted if the panel has a Memory Overflow trouble.
  • Page 228 MR-2400 Programming Manual (hours).(minutes).(seconds) T Set the time <Ctrl-V> Clear privilege (Set to User Privilege) (code) <Ctrl-V> Set privilege. (code) is either the Level 1 or Level 2 passcode programmed into the panel. Print database 90 ? Print archive 99 ? Print configuration <Esc>...
  • Page 229 MR-2400 Programming Manual Screen Name Description Errors For a signle circuit, shows a grid displaying all the incorrect, missing and mismatched devices. This shows the differences between what is expected to be on the circuit and what actually is on the circuit. Alarms For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying the current Alarm, Early Warning, Supvervisory and Trouble conditions for all devices on the...
  • Page 230 MR-2400 Programming Manual (0-127) <Tab> View selected screen. If selected screen is unused, the next available screen will be shown Display Next Address (0-199) A Display Selected Address Display Next Circuit (1-24) C Display Selected Circuit Reset Minimum/Maximum Values If Class A addressable circuits are programmed, the Addressable Module also supports the following commands: Energize All Circuits Energize Odd Circuits Only...
  • Page 231 MR-2400 Programming Manual 7.0 Appendix D: Table of Reporting Codes The following tables contain automatic Contact ID and SIA format reporting codes. Contact ID: The first digit (in parentheses) will automatically be sent by the control. The second two digits are to indicate specific information about the signal. For example, if zone 1 is a fire zone point, you could program the event code as [1A].
  • Page 232 MR-2400 Programming Manual Phone # 1 or 2 communication is restored after MA/R (3) 54 YC-XXX/ FTC Trouble/Rest. a failure to communicate YK-XXX** trouble has occurred; events not communicated during lapse will be sent Walk Test Start/ control panel has entered/ MA/R (6) A7 TS-000/...
  • Page 233 MR-2400 Programming Manual Table 4: SIA Format Automatic Zone Alarm/Restoral Codes Zone Alarm/Rest Rep Supervisory/Rest. Rep Trouble/Rest. Rep Definition Codes* Codes* Codes* Fire FA-ZZZ/FH-ZZZ FS-ZZZ/FR-ZZZ FT-ZZZ/FJ-ZZZ Sprinkler SA-ZZZ/SH-ZZZ SS-ZZZ/SR-ZZZ ST-ZZZ/SJ-ZZZ Heat KA-ZZZ/KH-ZZZ KS-ZZZ/KR-ZZZ KT-ZZZ/KJ-ZZZ Water WA-ZZZ/ WS-ZZZ/WR-ZZZ WT-ZZZ/WJ-ZZZ WH-ZZZ Untyped UA-ZZZ/UH-ZZZ US-ZZZ/UR-ZZZ UT-ZZZ/UJ-ZZZ...
  • Page 234 No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron. Canada Secutron Inc. 60 Industrial Parkway...
  • Page 235 M R - 2 4 0 0 Fire Alarm Control Unit PERATOR’S ANUAL Revision D Document #: LT-2007 WARNING: This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
  • Page 236 Secutron Inc. Secutron Inc. 25 Interchange Way Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3 Please call us at 1-888-695-3545 if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
  • Page 237 MR-2400 Operator’s Manual Contents 1.0 Unit Operation ............................1 1.1 Power Up Sequence.......................... 1 1.2 Types of Inputs ..........................1 1.3 Status Display............................ 2 1.4 Buzzer ............................... 2 1.5 Operator Keys ........................... 3 1.6 Alarm List............................6 1.7 LCD and Keypad ..........................8 1.8 Silent Walk Test..........................
  • Page 238 MR-2400 Operator’s Manual...
  • Page 239 MR-2400 Operator’s Manual 1.0 Unit Operation 1.1 Power Up Sequence The power up sequence of the panel is started in the following ways: power is applied to the panel; the hard reboot button underneath the terminal strip is pressed; a Network Reboot command is issued;...
  • Page 240 MR-2400 Operator’s Manual control modules will follow the non-reporting input's status. The LEDs, relays and control modules operated by non-reporting inputs cannot also be operated by Fire, Supervisory or Abort type inputs. 1.3 Status Display The status display is the top centre section of the front panel. It is visible through the front door. It consists of the common alarm LED, common supervisory LED, common trouble LED and AC power LED.
  • Page 241 MR-2400 Operator’s Manual 1.5 Operator Keys These are located below the Status Display. They are visible through the front door. There are 10 keys, each with red and green LED (some keys may have yellow instead of red LEDs). The LEDs are used to display function status.
  • Page 242 MR-2400 Operator’s Manual Action System System Reset resets part or all of the system. Reset The green LED flashes when the system, or part of the system, can be reset. The yellow LED flashes when there are conventional smoke detector circuits in alarm. Press System Reset to reset the smoke detectors.
  • Page 243 MR-2400 Operator’s Manual Action Test Mode Places panel into test mode. Press again to return to normal mode. The red LED will flash while in test mode. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1. It fol- lows the Disconnect privilege level (set in MHI).
  • Page 244 MR-2400 Operator’s Manual Releaser Disconnect, Relay Disconnect, Signal Disconnect, Common Disconnect and Test Mode can be made to time out automatically after 4 hours. Releaser Disconnect, Relay Disconnect, Signal Disconnect, Test Mode, and Common Disconnect all use the same privilege level. 1.6 Alarm List The Alarm List contains all the current Alarms, Supervisory Conditions and Troubles.
  • Page 245 MR-2400 Operator’s Manual The device message screen, if any, shows: Line 1: time, sequence number, and Condition Code Lines 2 to 4: description from the database See section 2.10 for a description of Condition Codes and Zone Numbers. The summary screen shows either the number of alarm, supervisory and trouble entries in the Alarm List...
  • Page 246 MR-2400 Operator’s Manual any values entered. If there is no value entered, <Clear> will return to the Status Menu. If the selected device is not in the database, the next device in the database is shown. The display shows the device address in the top left corner and the current condition codes in the top right corner (see section 2.0 for a description of the condition codes).
  • Page 247 MR-2400 Operator’s Manual Line 3: description of event (alarm, trouble, ground, restore, etc.) Line 4: device type The second screen shows: Line 1: time, sequence number, and date Lines 2 to 4: description from the database • Program: Displays the Clock Menu. This menu has 2 options: -- Date: View or change the date.
  • Page 248 MR-2400 Operator’s Manual 2.0 Supplementary Information 2.1 Condition Codes and Zone Numbers The History and Archive use the following formats for condition codes and zone numbering. Condition Code Archive Alarm List Description ALARM Alarm bypass Bypass Comlink dupl Duplicate Addressable Device alert Maintenance Alert ground...
  • Page 249 MR-2400 Operator’s Manual Notes: 1. These zones do not restore. 2. Privilege Level 0 generates a restore signal; all others generate a trouble signal. 3. This zone does not restore and is not repeated sequentially in the archive. Sub-Zone Number Addressable Circuit: Device Number Comlink 6 (Zone 54): ID of MR-2614, MR-2644, MR2801-MR or MR2806-MR Addressable Module Comlink (Zone 59): Always 001...
  • Page 250 EEPROM checksum Changing a value of an item set through the LCD menu will cause the panel to create a new checksum. If this error recurs, please contact Secutron Technical Support. The memory chip containing the configuration information is not working EEPROM failure correctly.
  • Page 251 MR-2400 Operator’s Manual Message Description The battery charger needs to be calibrated to provide proper supervision of battery charger not the batteries. To calibrate the charger, disconnect the batteries and select calibrated PROGRAM/BATTERY/CALIBRATE from the LCD menu. List the status of the 6 bell circuits and the 2 auxiliary power circuits. Each BBBBBBAA column represents one circuit.
  • Page 252 Reboot to correct this problem. If the panel is connected to an MR-2944 annunciator, do a Network Reboot. Please notify Secutron of the occurrence of this error. Include in your report the panel serial number and the name, date and time of the operating program.
  • Page 253 MR-2400 Operator’s Manual Message Description The operating program requires more extend RAM than the panel actually not enough ram has. Certain addressable functions and/or the alarm list may not work. Basic fire detection will continue to operate. Upgrade the RAM in the panel to clear this trouble.
  • Page 254 No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron. Canada Secutron Inc. 60 Industrial Parkway...
  • Page 255 ACKNOWLEDGE again. • To reset the system once the cause of the supervisory condition has been corrected, press SYSTEM RESET. FRAME AND MOUNT THESE INSTRUCTIONS ADJACENT TO THE PANEL © 2004 Secutron Inc., Vaughan, Ontario L4K 5W3 Canada LT-2008 Rev. B...
  • Page 256 M R - 2 9 0 0 Fire Alarm Control Unit NSTALLATION ANUAL Revision E Document #: LT-2010 WARNING: This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
  • Page 257 Secutron Inc. Secutron Inc. 25 Interchange Way Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3 Please call us at 1-888-SECUTRON (1-888-732-8876) if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
  • Page 258 Cautions and Warnings READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depends upon proper installation. DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED. Upon unpacking your equipment, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage.
  • Page 259 MR-2900 Installation Manual Contents 1.0 Technical Information..........................1 1.1 General ............................1 1.2 Main Circuit Board .......................... 1 1.3 Front Panel ............................. 2 1.4 Input Circuits ........................... 2 1.5 Input Circuits Modules ........................3 1.6 Terminal Board ..........................4 1.7 Annunciator Strip ..........................5 1.8 Power Supply..........................
  • Page 260 MR-2900 Installation Manual List of Figures and Tables Figures Figure 1: Exploded View..........................7 Figure 2: Back Box Dimension and Knockout Reference................9 Figure 3: AC Power Connection ........................10 Figure 4: Conventional Style B (Class B) Wiring .................... 10 Figure 4: Conventional Style B (Class B) Wiring ....................
  • Page 261 MR-2900 Installation Manual...
  • Page 262 MR-2900 Installation Manual 1.0 Technical Information 1.1 General The MR-2900 Fire Alarm Control Unit provides capability for up to 24 Input Circuits, 4 or 8 Polarity Reversing Bell Circuits, network capabilities (with use of an MR-2910 Network Board) and 4 General Purpose Form "C"...
  • Page 263 MR-2900 Installation Manual Ports 1 to 3 use the terminal strip on the Terminal Board for connection. Ports 4 and 5 use the connectors mounted on the bottom of the Main Circuit Board. Port 6 uses a connector on the top of the Terminal Board.

  • Page 264: Input Circuits Modules

    MR-2900 Installation Manual Ω devices and using a 470 End-of-Line Resistor, model T301-9020. Two-wire smoke detectors cannot be used on this type of circuit. • Smoke Detector - This is a supervised circuit supporting two-wire smoke detectors only. Both "Class B", using the Resistor (T301-9017), and "Class A" wiring is available depending upon the Input Circuit Module used (see '1.5 next page).

  • Page 265: Terminal Board

    MR-2900 Installation Manual Table 1: Input Circuit Module Compatibility MR-2908 MR-2918 MR-2928 MR-2938 Class A (Contact) Class B (Contact) Smoke Detector Class B Only Class B Only Class A Only Smoke Detector and Class B Only Class B Only Class A Only Contact Device Normally Open Normally Closed...

  • Page 266: Annunciator Strip

    MR-2900 Installation Manual AC power and battery power is indicated. The N.O. and N.C. markings on the Trouble relay refer to this energized state. The operation of the general purpose relays and bell/releasing circuits is totally program defined. It is possible to program the activation of circuits to any zone, group of zones, device, group of devices and to further inhibit the operation for a specifiable period of time.

  • Page 267: Optional Integrated Printer

    MR-2900 Installation Manual LEDs. Up to 254 units (Control and/or Annunciator) can be networked togetherThe MR-2900 network meets UL requirements only. The network is a Class A/Style 7 DCLR loop layout (see diagram). Each unit on the network requires the MR-2910 Network Board. Programming, servicing and testing are done at each individual unit.
  • Page 268 MR-2900 Installation Manual 2.0 Installation 2.1 Unpacking the MR-2900 The basic MR-2900 package includes the following components: Backbox MR-2920 MR-2920 BACKBOX TOROIDAL PRINTER Outer door including: TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY POWER SUPPLY MR-2900 • Lock BACKBOX DEAD FRONT DOOR • Display window •...
  • Page 269 MR-2900 Installation Manual 4. Mark placement of mounting hardware, drill holes and install plugs (if necessary). 5. Secure the FACP to the wall using hardware suitable to the wall construction. Support backbox in place while inserting hardware and ensure that the backbox is level and plumb before tightening.
  • Page 270 MR-2900 Installation Manual wire to the red (positive) terminal. If the batteries need charging, the Low Battery condition remains until they are charged.
  • Page 271 MR-2900 Installation Manual 14-1/2" (368 mm) 7/8" (23 mm) lip each side 3/4" (19 mm) lip top and bottom 16-1/8" (410 mm) 5-1/2" (140 mm) 3" (76 mm) 1-1/4" (32 mm) 21-3/4" (552 mm) 27-1/2" 29" 26-1/2" (699 mm) (740 mm) (673 mm) 8-1/2"...
  • Page 272 MR-2900 Installation Manual 2.4 Wiring Power Connections The Main Control Unit requires an AC power supply. This supply is connected as shown in Figure 3. The batteries forming the Battery Pack are wired in series. The Battery Pack attaches to the two wires coming from the Power Supply Board, the black wire to the black (negative) terminal and the red wire to the red (positive) terminal.
  • Page 273 MR-2900 Installation Manual T301-9017 resistor. Detectors and the end-of-line device are connected as illustrated in Figure 6. Use only smoke detectors that are listed for compatibility. Note: This circuit is supported only by the MR-2918 and MR-2928 Input Circuit Modules. This circuit may be wired on any of the 24 input circuits on the MR-2900 terminal boards.
  • Page 274 Wire capacitance and resistance affects the allowable wire length. Figure 11: Addressable Style 6 (Class A) Consult Secutron's Applications Department for Wiring specific requirements. Devices are connected as illustrated in Figure 11. Use only approved devices.
  • Page 275 MR-2900 Installation Manual 9580 2 435m (8 000 ft) 9582 3 045m (10 000 ft) Addressable Modules The addressable module extended circuits are wired as shown on the next page in Figures 12 - Figure 12: MRI-M500M Wiring...
  • Page 276 MR-2900 Installation Manual Figure 13: MRI-M501 Wiring Figure 14: MRI-M502M Wiring Figure 15: MRI-M500S Wiring for Signalling Circuits Figure 16: MRI-M500R Wiring for Form C Relay Use...
  • Page 277 MR-2900 Installation Manual Figure 17: MRI-M500X Wiring Style Y (Class B) Bell Circuit This is a 2-wire Style Y (Class B) power-limited supervised signalling (notification appliance) circuit. Devices and the 10 k end-of- line resister are connected as illustrated in Figure 18.
  • Page 278 MR-2900 Installation Manual 2. The inrush current of some devices may cause the current to exceed the 1.5A current limit momentarily. 3. In order to meet NFPA 72 requirements in section 1-5.4.7 for distinctive signals, you must mount a separate audible device in the same room as the fire alarm control panel. Audible indicating appliance circuit shall be run in conduit and loaded no more than 15ft from the fire alarm control unit.
  • Page 279 MR-2900 Installation Manual Relay Connections Unused relays are left unconnected. General Purpose Relays and System Relays operate identically and are wired the same (see Figure 22). All relay wiring is supervised. The general purpose relays (Function Relays 1-4) have a power factor of .35, power-limited at .6A @ 30VAC/2.0A @ 30VDC and are located on terminal blocks TB7 and TB8 on the MR-2900 terminal board.
  • Page 280 MR-2900 Installation Manual Table 5: Maximum Capacitance for Network Baud Rates Baud Rate Maximum Capacitance Maximum Network Nodes 9600 100 nF 4800 220 nF 2400 470 nF 1200 680 nF RS-232 Network Wiring RS-232 Network wiring uses three (3) wires between each panel (see Figure 26).
  • Page 281 MR-2900 Installation Manual MR-2801-MR and MR295101 Wiring If the MR295104-MR Isolator is not used, then the MR-2801-MR or MR295101 are wired as shown. AUX 1 BLACK AUX 2 MR-2900 WHITE CABLE PROVIDED COMLINK3 STRIPED CON1 MR-2801 MR-295101 Figure 28: MR-2801-MR and MR295101 Wiring Evax System Wiring MR2900 BACKPLATE...
  • Page 282 MR-2900 Installation Manual 3.0 Technical Specifications Power Line 120 VAC, 300 VA (nominal) Standby 24 VDC, 100 mA (nominal) Alarm plus Bell/Releasing Circuits Brown Out Voltage 93 VAC (typical) normal standby/95 VAC (typical) alarm Battery Charger 2.3 A max. charging current Battery Type Sealed lead acid, up to 48 Ah, 24 V (UL listed up to 38Ah) Input (Initiating Device) Circuits (24)
  • Page 283 MR-2900 Installation Manual Note: Consult Appendix C UL Listed Compatible Devices System Relays (3) Type Form C, one each for Alarm, Supervisory and Trouble Rating 0.5 A @ 30VAC (resistive) / 1.0A @ 24VDC Note: These relays are not listed by UL for use for connection to equipment outside the same room as the Control Panel.
  • Page 284 MR-2900 Installation Manual Battery Boxes Model Capacity Size 15" x 5 d" x 4 3" MR-2996 10 Ah MR-2997 24 Ah 21" x 9" x 7" MR-2998 38 Ah 21" x 9" x 7" MR-2999 48 Ah 21" x 9" x 7"...
  • Page 285 MR-2900 Installation Manual 4.0 Parts List Model Description Basic Control Unit MR-2900 Basic Control Unit (with or without MR-2920 strip printer) Optional Modules MR-2908 Conventional Input Circuit Module, 8 Circuit, 10 mA, contact cir- cuits only MR-2918 Conventional Input Circuit Module, 8 Circuit, 80 mA, smoke circuits only MR-2928 Conventional Input Circuit Module, 8 Circuit, Software Selectable...
  • Page 286 MR-2900 Installation Manual Model Description MR-2905 Power Supply, included with Back Box for Basic System MR-2926 Terminal Board, c/w Class B Bell Circuits, Relays and MR-2927 Board MR-2925 Terminal Board, c/w Class A Bell Circuits, Relays and MR-2927 Board MR-2927 Terminal Board Plug-in Board for MR-2926 and MR-2925 Hardware MR-2970...
  • Page 287 MR-2900 Installation Manual 5.0 Appendix A: Stand-by Battery Calculation 5.1 General Batteries are designed and manufactured for a specific use. "Standby" is one of these uses. They are rated according to their ability to deliver a steady current for 20 hours ("20 Hour Rating"). A 10 Ah battery is unable to deliver 10 A for 1 hour, however it does deliver 2 A (500 mA) for 20 hours.
  • Page 288 MR-2900 Installation Manual 5.2 Sample Calculation The current draw of any other devices, such as detectors, addressable modules, also have to be included in the calculations. This would include any devices connected to the two Aux Power connections. A typical calculation for 24 hour stand-by operation plus 5 minutes of signalling device operation would be: Board/Device Draw (mA)

  • Page 289: Appendix B: Ulc Listed Compatible Smoke Detectors

    MR-2900 Installation Manual 6.0 Appendix B: ULC Listed Compatible Smoke Detectors The following conventional smoke detectors are ULC listed for compatibility with the MR-2900 Control Panel using Conventional Circuit Input Modules: Company Model System Sensor 1400 1451 2400 2400TH 2451 2451TH Hochiki Photoelectric...

  • Page 290: Appendix C: Ul Listed Compatible Devices

    MR-2900 Installation Manual 7.0 Appendix C: UL Listed Compatible Devices 7.1 Smoke Detectors A The following Listed 2-wire smoke detectors and bases are compatible with the MR-2900 Control Panel using the MR-2918 and MR-2928 Conventional Input Circuit Modules (with compatibility µ...
  • Page 291 MR-2900 Installation Manual Smoke Base Standby Manufacturer Detector Model Current Identifier Identifier Model 80 µA Fenwal CPD-7023 I3FE1 CPD-001 FE01A 80 µA CPD-7023 I3FE1 CPD-002 FE02A 80 µA CPD-7023 I3FE1 CPD-003 FE03A 80 µA CPD-7023 I3FE1 CPD-005 FE05A 60 µA CPD-7051 I3FE1 2-Wire...
  • Page 292 MR-2900 Installation Manual Smoke Base Standby Manufacturer Detector Model Current Identifier Identifier Model Gentex 224-25 102 µA Hochiki SIF-24F HD-2 HS-221D HB-4 102 µA SIF-24F HD-2 YBA-M221 HB-4 130 µA SIH-24F HD-3 HS-221D HB-4 130 µA SIH-24F HD-3 YBA-M221 HB-4 142 µA SLK-24F HD-3...

  • Page 293: Smoke Detectors B

    MR-2900 Installation Manual 7.2 Smoke Detectors B The following Listed 2-wire smoke detectors and bases are compatible with the MR-2900 Control Panel using the MR-2938 Conventional Input Circuit Module with compatibility identifier as MR- 2938. Up to 2.50 mA of smoke detector normal standby load may be connected to each MR-2938 conventional initiating device circuit.
  • Page 294 MR-2900 Installation Manual 7.3 Notification Appliances The following notification appliances, where a current rating is shown, may be used with the MR-2900 Control Units. Input Current at 24 VDC (in mA) Model Type Audible Visual Wheelock MT-12/24-R Multi tone Horn 48 (Hi), 26 (Lo) MT-24-WH-VN-W Multi tone Horn w/ Strobe, ADA...
  • Page 295 MR-2900 Installation Manual Input Current at 24 VDC (in mA) Model Type Audible Visual WST-24-FR Strobe WS1T-24-FR Strobe WS3T-24-FR Strobe WHT-24-FR Strobe WH1T-24-FR Strobe WH3T-24-FR Strobe WMT-24-FR Strobe WM1T-24-FR Strobe WM3T-24-FR Strobe VLPM-24-W-VF-R Strobe 34T-24-R Horn 7001T-24-W-FR Strobe Horn 63 (combined) 7002T-24-W-FR Strobe Horn 63 (combined)
  • Page 296 MR-2900 Installation Manual Input Current at 24 VDC (in mA) Model Type Audible Visual CH-DF1-WM-24-VF-R Strobe Chime MB-G6-24-R Motorized Bell, 6 in. MB-G10-24-R Motorized Bell, 10 in. MBS-G6-24-W-HF-R Motorized Strobe Bell, 6 in. 55 (combined) MBS-G10-24-W-HF-R Motorized Strobe Bell, 10 in. 55 (combined) 46T-G4-24-R Vibrating Bell, 4 in.
  • Page 297 MR-2900 Installation Manual Input Current at 24 VDC (in mA) Model Type Audible Visual E-7025-WM-24-VF-R Strobe Speaker E-7025-WM-24-VF-W Strobe Speaker E-7070-WM-24-VF-R Strobe Speaker E-7070-WM-24-VF-W Strobe Speaker ET-1010-WS-24-HF-R Strobe Speaker ET-1070-WS-24-VF-R Strobe Speaker ET-1080-WS-24-VF-R Strobe Speaker ET-1090-WS-24-CF-W Strobe Speaker ET-1070-WM-24-VF-R Strobe Speaker ET-1070-WM-24-VF-W Strobe Speaker ET-1080-WM-24-VF-R...
  • Page 298 MR-2900 Installation Manual Input Current at 24 VDC (in mA) Model Type Audible Visual NH-12/24 Horn NS-2415W Strobe Horn 76 (combined) NS-241575W Strobe Horn 90 (combined) NS-2430W Strobe Horn 102 (combined) NS-2475W Strobe Horn 163 (combined) NS-24110W Strobe Horn 195 (combined) NS4-2415W Strobe Horn NS4-241575W...
  • Page 299 MR-2900 Installation Manual Input Current at 24 VDC (in mA) Model Type Audible Visual AMT-24-LS Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync AMT-24-LSM Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync AMT-24-MS Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync AMT-24-IS Multitone Strobe Signal, non sync AMT-24-SL Multitone Strobe Signal, sync AMT-24-SLM Multitone Strobe Signal, sync AMT4-24-LS...
  • Page 300 MR-2900 Installation Manual Input Current at 24 VDC (in mA) Model Type Audible Visual CH70-2475C Strobe Chime CH70-24100C Strobe Chime CH90-2415C Strobe Chime CH90-2430C Strobe Chime CH90-2475C Strobe Chime CH90-24100C Strobe Chime RSS-24l5W Strobe RSS-241575W Strobe RSS-243OW Strobe RSS-2475W Strobe RSS-24110W Strobe RSSP-24110W...
  • Page 301 MR-2900 Installation Manual Input Current at 24 VDC (in mA) Model Type Audible Visual ET70 -2475W Strobe Speaker ET70-24110W Strobe Speaker ET90-2415W Strobe Speaker ET90-241575W Strobe Speaker ET90-24 30W Strobe Speaker ET90-2475W Strobe Speaker ET90-24110W Strobe Speaker ET90-2415C Strobe Speaker ET90-2430C Strobe Speaker ET90-2475C...
  • Page 302 MR-2900 Installation Manual Input Current at 24 VDC (in mA) Model Type Audible Visual E70-2475W Strobe Speaker E70-24110W Strobe Speaker E70 -2415C Strobe Speaker E70 -2430C Strobe Speaker E70-2475C Strobe Speaker E70 -24100C Strobe Speaker E90 -2415W Strobe Speaker E90 -241575W Strobe Speaker E90 -2430W Strobe Speaker...
  • Page 303 MR-2900 Installation Manual Input Current at 24 VDC (in mA) Model Type Audible Visual GEC24-30 Commander2 Horn/Strobe 30 cd 78 (combined) GEC24-60 Commander2 Horn/Strobe 60 cd 103 (combined) GEC24-75 Commander2 Horn/Strobe 75 cd 110 (combined) GEC24-110 Commander2 Horn/Strobe 110 cd 123 (combined) GMH24 Mechanical Horn...
  • Page 304 MR-2900 Installation Manual Input Current at 24 VDC (in mA) Model Type Audible Visual GXS-4-15/75-C Strobe 15/75 Cd Ceiling GXS-4-15/75-Z Strobe 15/75 Cd Sync GXS-4-30 Strobe 30 Cd GXS-4-30/75 Strobe 30/75 Cd GXS-4-60 Strobe 60 Cd GXS-4-110 Strobe 110 Cd HG124 Electronic Horn 12 or 24 Vdc SHG24-15...
  • Page 305 MR-2900 Installation Manual Input Current at 24 VDC (in mA) Model Type Audible Visual SPKE8-30/75 Speaker/Strobe 8@ 30/75 cd SPKE4-60 Speaker/Strobe 4@ 60 cd SPKE8-60 Speaker/Strobe 8@ 60 cd SPKE4-110 Speaker/Strobe 4@ 110 cd SPKE8-110 Speaker/Strobe 8@ 110 cd ST24-15 Commander Strobe 15 cd ST24-15/75 Commander Strobe 15/75 cd...
  • Page 306 MR-2900 Installation Manual Input Current at 24 VDC (in mA) Model Type Audible Visual SSU7522 Speaker/Strobe SSU7526 Horn/Strobe 143 (combined) SSU7527 Speaker/Strobe SSU7531 Horn/Strobe 173 (combined) SSU7532 Speaker/Strobe System Sensor P2415 (R) (W) Horn/Strobe P241575 (R) (W) Horn/Strobe P2475 (R) (W) Horn/Strobe P24110 (R) (W) Horn/Strobe...
  • Page 307 MR-2900 Installation Manual Input Current at 24 VDC (in mA) Model Type Audible Visual SSM24-8 Bell SSM24-10 Bell MA12/24D Electronic Sounder SS24LO Strobe SS24LOC Strobe SS24M Strobe SS24MC Strobe SS24LOLA Strobe MASS24LO Electronic Sounder/Strobe MASS24LOC Electronic Sounder/Strobe MASS24LOLA Electronic Sounder/Strobe MASS24M Electronic Sounder/Strobe MASS24MC...
  • Page 308 MR-2900 Installation Manual Input Current at 24 VDC (in mA) Model Type Audible Visual MASS2415ADAS Horn/Strobe MASS241575ADAS Horn/Strobe RP2415ADA Strobe RP241575ADA Strobe RP2475ADA Strobe RP24110ADA Strobe 7.4 Auxiliary Power Devices The following Listed devices are compatible with the output of the 24 VDC auxiliary power circuits of the MR-2900.
  • Page 309 Refer to the installation instructions which accompany each device for details of installation wiring and proper application. Manufacturer Model Type Secutron MRI-1251B Ionization type smoke detector MRI-2251B Photoelectric type smoke detector MRI-2251TB...
  • Page 310 MR-2900 Installation Manual Manufacturer Model Type System Sensor 1251 Ionization type smoke detector 1251B Ionization type smoke detector 1551 Ionization type smoke detector 2251 Photoelectric type smoke detector 2251B Photoelectric type smoke detector 2251T Photoelectric type smoke detector w/ thermal element 2251TB Photoelectric type smoke detector w/ thermal element 2251TMB...
  • Page 311 MR-2900 Installation Manual 7.6 Compatible Door Holder/Releasers The following listed door holders are compatible with the MR-2900 and MR-2400 door holder/ releaser circuits: Input Current Manufacturer Model Type at 24 VDC Harrington 1501-G1 Single Door, Floor Mount 70 mA 1502-G1 Double Door, Floor Mount 140 mA 1504-G1...

  • Page 312: Appendix D: Interconnection To Other Equipment

    MR-2900 Installation Manual 8.0 Appendix D: Interconnection to Other Equipment 8.1 Radionics 2071C and 2071AC The wiring between the MR-2900 and the Radionics 2071C and 2071AC Dialers is as shown in the following diagram: An addressable module may be substituted for the alarm relay as follows: Trouble and supervisory contacts must be connected to the panel.
  • Page 313 MR-2900 Installation Manual 8.2 Silent Knight 5104 The wiring between the MR-2900 and the Silent Knight 5104 Dialer is as shown in the following diagram: An addressable module may be substituted for the common alarm relay as follows: An addressable module may be substituted for the common supervisory relay as follows: 4.7k to FACP 5104...
  • Page 314 MR-2900 Installation Manual 8.3 CTM City Tie Module The CTM is designed to interface between a control panel and a local city tie box. The interface from the control panel is via a 24VDC signal circuit. This module is intended for connection to the control unit at the protected premises.
  • Page 315 MR-2900 Installation Manual 8.4 Keltron 3158 TTM The Keltron 3158 TTM and the MR-2900 are wired together as shown below: Addressable control modules cannot be used with the Keltron 3158 TTM. Note: The Keltron 3158 TTM is separately listed equipment. Refer to the installation and wiring instructions provided with the unit.
  • Page 316 •Software Secutron Secutron Most products contain software.
  • Page 317 MR-2900 Installation Manual breakdowns, interruptions, loss, destruction, alteration or other problems in the use of a product arising our of, or caused by, the software. Every fire is different in the amount and rate at which smoke and heat are generated. Smoke detectors cannot sense all types of fires equally well.
  • Page 318 During the warranty period, Secutron Inc. shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials. Any replacement and/or repaired parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer.
  • Page 319 Products which Secutron Inc. determines to be repairable will be repaired and returned. A set fee which Secutron Inc. has predetermined and which may be revised from time to time, will be charged for each unit repaired. Products which Secutron Inc. determines not to be repairable will be replaced by the nearest equivalent product available at that time.
  • Page 320 No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron. Canada U.S.A 25 Interchange Way...
  • Page 321 M R - 2 9 0 0 Fire Alarm Control Unit ROGRAMMING ANUAL Revision D Document #: LT-2011 WARNING: This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
  • Page 322 Secutron Inc. Secutron Inc. 25 Interchange Way Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3 Please call us at 1-888-695-3545 if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
  • Page 323 MR-2900 Programming Manual Contents 1.0 Operation and Programming Concepts ....................1 1.1 General Comments......................... 1 1.2 Networks ............................2 1.3 Addressable Devices ........................4 1.4 Releasing Service ........................... 7 1.5 Resetting 4-Wire Detectors......................8 2.0 Editing MHI Databases ..........................9 2.1 General Comments.........................
  • Page 324 MR-2900 Programming Manual...
  • Page 325 MR-2900 Programming Manual List of Figures and Tables Figures Figure 1: Typical Network Layout ........................2 Figure 2: Single Network Break........................3 Figure 3: Panel Removed From Network ....................... 4 Figure 4: 4-Wire Device Wiring (Typical)......................8 Figure 5: System Window..........................10 Figure 6: Switches Window ..........................
  • Page 326 MR-2900 Programming Manual...
  • Page 327 MR-2900 Programming Manual 1.0 Operation and Programming Concepts Warnings: Before Programming 1. All applicable codes and standards should be considered when programming the Control Unit. 2. The Control Unit continues to monitor input circuits and devices and acts according to the current program settings if an alarm is received while it is being programmed.
  • Page 328 MR-2900 Programming Manual 1.2 Networks General The MR-2900 can be incorporated into a network including other MR-2900 panels, MR-2200 panels and MR-2944 annunciators. Though up to 254 panels and annunciators can be supported by the network, such a network would probably be too large to properly maintain. The network can be setup for single building or multiple building operation.
  • Page 329 MR-2900 Programming Manual has become available. This will cause the LEDs to continue flashing after the key is pressed until the frame is received to turn off the LED. Time/Date Change This broadcast frame is sent by a panel or annunciator if the time or date is changed. The master panel also will send both a date and time change frame at 3:30am every day to synchronize all the clocks in the network.
  • Page 330 MR-2900 Programming Manual Broadcast Frames Broadcast frames deal with information that affects the entire network. When a broadcast frame is created by a panel or annunciator, it is sent out both network communications ports. Each unit in turn will receive the broadcast in one port, act upon it and pass it on out the other port. Upon reaching the unit that generated the broadcast frame, that unit then disposes of it.
  • Page 331 MR-2900 Programming Manual The MRI-M500DM dual monitor module has two Class (Style) B input circuits. The first input uses the address dialled into the module and the second uses that address plus 1. That is, if the dials are set for address 34, the monitor modules to be programmed into MHI are at addresses 134 and 135.
  • Page 332 MR-2900 Programming Manual circuit to prevent excess current flow. While the panel will continue to respond to further alarms from the circuit, the panel will not turn on additional LEDs. The MRI-B501BH and MRI-B501BHT sounder bases require a separate 24 VDC supply for operation. If the polarity of this supply is reversed for more than 10 seconds, the sounder base will activate.
  • Page 333 MR-2900 Programming Manual 1.4 Releasing Service The eight output circuits are available for releasing service through programming. The MRI-M500S control module can also be programmed for releasing. Releasers can be programmed to be normally On (Continuous) or normally Off (Momentary). Continuous releasers will be turned off by a loss of AC power as well as by input.
  • Page 334 MR-2900 Programming Manual 1.5 Resetting 4-Wire Detectors 4-wire detectors can be reset by using one of the function relays on the panel. The relay is not programmed for any use, that is, it is unassigned. The next requirement is that a non-zero duration be programmed for it (see the section Outputs Dialog).
  • Page 335 These circuits use different circuitry and cannot have their function changed. These panels can be used in a network configuration. This panel type is no longer produced. • MR-2100/MR-2200 Fire Panel: Can be used in a network configuration with MR-2900 control panels.
  • Page 336 MR-2900 Programming Manual • MR-2400 Fire Panel: Not discussed in this manual. • MR-2944 Annunciator: It includes the memory required to have a database loaded into it. This allows for less information to be sent on the network. An optional 4x20 LCD can be included.
  • Page 337 MR-2900 Programming Manual • Alert: A First Stage alarm activates the selected bells in Alert mode. If the Signal Silence or Second Stage Inhibit Hot Key is not pressed before the NAK timeout, the panel will progress to Second Stage. Second stage will activate all bells in Evacuation mode. •...
  • Page 338 The System Banner is a 20 character message that is used as a banner for the Main Menu of the LCD. The default banner is “Modul-R by Secutron”. The Enforce Local LED Rules check box forces an LED on an input's panel be related. Normally an LED anywhere in the system is all that is required.
  • Page 339 MR-2900 Programming Manual The System Window has the following push buttons on the right hand side: • Exit: Closes the System Window and, if editing, saves the database. At this time, a requester will ask if the database should be Verified. A database has to verify without errors before it can be downloaded.
  • Page 340 MR-2900 Programming Manual The HH:MM (Timer) entries control the times that the switch will change state. An even number of times must be entered, ie. each on must have a corresponding off. All times are entered using 24 hour notation, eg: one minute after midnight=0:01, noon=12:00, 3 PM=15:00, 4 AM=4:00, etc. A time of 0:00 is considered as not used.
  • Page 341 MR-2900 Programming Manual The use of Groups greatly simplifies the changes made to a database. For example, if a new door is installed that has to be unlocked during a fire alarm, the control module that unlocks the door is simply added to a Group.
  • Page 342 MR-2900 Programming Manual 2.5 Panel Window The Panel Window (see Figure 8) allows editing of all panel level options. It defines the hardware mounted in the panel and the functionality of the programmable outputs. The programming controls provided will change to reflect the capabilities of the currently selected panel. The Title Bar will describe the currently highlighted panel or annunciator.
  • Page 343 MR-2900 Programming Manual different panel is selected, all the controls in the window will change to reflect this. Use the <Backspace> key in order to quickly re-position the current selection to another panel. The Message is located to the right of the Panel List. This is a 3 line by 20 character message that is associated with the Panel.
  • Page 344 MR-2900 Programming Manual The IDs button displays all possible IDs of the MR-2614 and MR- 2644 annunciators (see Figure 9) as well as the MR-2801B-MR and Dialler. Check the IDs that will be connected to the system. If the MR2614 Connect box is checked, IDs for MR-2614 annunciators must also be checked.
  • Page 345 MR-2900 Programming Manual The LEDs have the following meaning when flashing: Zone n alarm: Acknowledge available Zone n+2 alarm: 2nd Stage Inhibit available Zone n supervisory: Reset available (green) Zone n+2 supervisory Future use Zone n trouble: Reset available (yellow) Zone n+2 trouble Future use Zone n+1 alarm: Signal Silence active Zone n+3 alarm Future use...
  • Page 346 MR-2900 Programming Manual • Momentary Releaser (M. Releaser): This type of releaser is inactive until an alarm is received on a zone activating the releaser. The releaser is then not activated until after the Delay time. The releaser is turned off after the Duration time, or the activating zone and panel are reset.
  • Page 347 MR-2900 Programming Manual Bypass Priv. sets the privilege level required to set circuit and device bypasses, and manual control of relays, control modules and switches. This privilege can be set to Level 2 (default) or Level 1. Disconnect sets the privilege level required for the Disconnect and Test Mode Hot Keys. These can be set to Level 1 (default) or Level 0.
  • Page 348 MR-2900 Programming Manual Strobe Duration Time sets the time that strobe circuits will operate when activated when operated along with coded bells. The timer starts when the coded bells start. At the end of the timer, the strobes are silenced. A time of 0 (zero) disables the automatic silence. This value can be from 10 to 510 seconds.
  • Page 349 MR-2900 Programming Manual The keys and their functions are as follows: Action Acknowledge Silences the buzzer and acknowledges new troubles and alarms. If the buzzer is on, Acknowledge will silence it. If the buzzer is not on, any flashing LEDs will become steady.
  • Page 350 MR-2900 Programming Manual Action Relay Causes the function relays and control modules to ignore any new alarms. Press Disconnect again to restore normal operation. The yellow LED will flash while active. If no relays nor control modules can be disconnected, Relay Disconnect will do nothing. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1.
  • Page 351 MR-2900 Programming Manual Action Switch n On Change the state of the software switch n between Auto and On. The yellow LED will flash while the switch is forced On. The green LED will flash whenever the switch is on, either automatically or forced. Switches can affect relays, control mod- ules and LEDs.
  • Page 352 MR-2900 Programming Manual Dialer Configuration 1 The Dialer Configuration 1 dialog (see Figure 16) contains the First Communicator Options, Second Communicator Options International Options. Communications option determines dialer will communicate to the central station. When Enabled is selected, the dialer will communicate all events as programmed.
  • Page 353 MR-2900 Programming Manual The Pulse Make/Break Ratio option is for panels in international applications. When 40/60 is selected, the pulse dialing make/break ratio is the 40/60, and when 33/67 is selected it is 33/67. The Handshake option determines the handshake used for BPS transmissions. When 1600 Hz is selected, the dialer responds to a 1600 Hz handshake.
  • Page 354 MR-2900 Programming Manual Call Directions The Call Directions dialog (see Figure 18) contains the options that determine which telephone numbers will used communicate events. There are five different types of events that can each be sent to telephone number telephone number two. The event types Fire Zone...
  • Page 355 MR-2900 Programming Manual The Dialer Maintenance and Common Reporting Codes dialog (see Figure 20) contains maintenance common reporting codes that the dialer will use to communicate those events. The Reporting Codes List is a list of all available maintenance and common reporting codes. Select one to program its reporting code.
  • Page 356 MR-2900 Programming Manual The Device List is located in the top left corner of the window. It is shown on the Devices Window only. lists defined addressable devices current addressable circuit, the two entries for a dual end-of-line circuit, and the separate smoke detector and n/o contract device for a Smoke Detector + N/O Contact circuit.
  • Page 357 MR-2900 Programming Manual • Alarm: This is a generic fire input. Displays **ALARM** in the Alarm List when activated. • Pull Station: This is a fire input similar to Alarm. The differences are it displays **PULL STATION** in the Alarm List and may not have a retard time programmed. •...
  • Page 358 MR-2900 Programming Manual Options Dialog, when Reset is pressed on the panel. The operation of Control Modules (supervising) is not affected by this setting. • Disable Maintenance Alert: Disables the addressable smoke or heat sensor from reporting Maintenance Alert. Maintenance Alert is defined by the device staying at almost alarm threshold for an extended period of time.
  • Page 359 MR-2900 Programming Manual There is no check at this time as to the validity of the values copied. Unexpected results can occur if care is not taken. For each database that is created, a warning about using copy is shown. Marking the check box in the warning will stop the box from appearing again for the database.
  • Page 360 MR-2900 Programming Manual operation are programmed using the Relate button. If the bells have been disconnected on the panel, this circuit will not be generated. • Internal Circuit 82, 2nd Stage Alarm: This circuit is activated if the bells and strobes are activated in the second stage mode by an alarm input or by a time-out.
  • Page 361 MR-2900 Programming Manual 2.8 Relate Window The Relate Window (see Figure 25) allows for the relating of inputs, switches and groups to outputs, LEDs, relays, etc. These relationships are used by the panel to determine which outputs to operate for alarm and trouble states.
  • Page 362 MR-2900 Programming Manual the panel; for switches, it is displayed if there are any addressable detectors, or any control or relay modules defined. Each entry shows the devices’s address (panel. circuit.device), its state and its device message. The states are *on* for selected and blank for not selected. If Complex Releasers are enabled, control modules programmed for releasers can have three other states: Fast which operates the releaser immediately regardless of any delay that is programmed in;...
  • Page 363 Level 2 allows programming of almost all system parameters. Higher Privilege Levels are reserved for Secutron's own use and are not discussed here. Certain functions can be assigned to different privilege levels. These functions default to the higher of the two privilege levels.
  • Page 364 MR-2900 Programming Manual For all screens, <Clear> returns to the previous menu level without changing any information and <Home> returns to the Main Menu without changing any information. 3.2 Clock This menu has the following options: • Date: View or change the date. The date is entered in MM.DD.YY format. Each section of the date must be separated by a dot.
  • Page 365 MR-2900 Programming Manual • All Off: Force switches into the Off mode. The number displayed is the number of timers that are switched On. This option is shown only if no switches have timers associated with them. • All Auto: Force all switches with timers to Auto mode. All switches with timers will go into the state dictated by the time.
  • Page 366 MR-2900 Programming Manual draw limitations, only the first 5 detectors on a circuit will latch their LEDs. This has no effect on other panel operation. -- OFF/ON: The LEDs are normally off and will latch on in Alarm. The LEDs will be reset when System Reset is pressed.
  • Page 367 MR-2900 Programming Manual -- OFF: Select devices under test to be returned to normal operation. Each device under test is listed in order. Select next to keep the device under test or select OFF to remove the test mode. After the last device, display returns to the Test menu. Press <Clear> to return to the Test Menu.
  • Page 368 MR-2900 Programming Manual -- Reboot: Cause all panels on the network to do a Hard reboot, ie. equivalent to pressing the Hard Reboot button on the top of the Inner Door. Each panel will record in the history the time it received the Network Reboot command. -- Global Commands: Sends the selected key to all Control and Annunciator Units on the Network.
  • Page 369 MR-2900 Programming Manual DEVICE (default): Send the device address or internal circuit number without translation. ZONE: Send the LED number turned on for input circuits and devices and send the internal circuit for internal circuits. GROUP: Send the associated Group ID(s) for all conditions. Anything not associated with a specific group will send a group number of 0.
  • Page 370 There is a special Level 2 passcode that is variable from day to day. It can be obtained from Secutron if the Level 2 passcode is forgotten. 3.13 Memory This function is restricted to Privilege Level 2. This menu has the following options: •...
  • Page 371 MR-2900 Programming Manual 4.0 Appendix A: Condition Codes and Zone Numbers The Alarm List and Archive use the following formats for condition codes and zone numbering. Condition Code Archive Alarm List Description ALARM Alarm bypass Bypass Comlink dupl Duplicate Addressable Device alert Maintenance Alert ground...
  • Page 372 MR-2900 Programming Manual Zone Number PPP:ZZ.SSS Format: Control Panel Number Panel Zone Panel Panel Description Description Zone Zone General Alarm Comlink 3 Initiating Circuit 1 Comlink 6 Initiating Circuit 2 Printer Port Initiating Circuit 3 Addressable Modules Comlink Initiating Circuit 4 Output (bell/releaser) Supervision Initiating Circuit 5 Auxiliary Power Supervision...
  • Page 373 MR-2900 Programming Manual Comlink 1 (Zone 51): Unit Network ID number Comlink 3 (Zone 53): Unit ID number Note: Only MR-2614 Annunciators use IDs other than 000. Addressable Module Comlink (Zone 59): 001 - Circuits 1 to 8 002 - Circuits 9 to 16 003 - Circuits 17 to 24 Output Supervision (Zone 60): Output Circuit Number Auxiliary Power Supervision (Zone 61): Auxiliary Power Circuit Number...
  • Page 374 MR-2900 Programming Manual 039 - Switch 8 Off 040 - Switch 9 Off 041 - Switch 10 Off 042 - Switch 11 Off 043 - Switch 12 Off 044 - Switch 13 Off 045 - Switch 14 Off 046 - Switch 15 Off 047 - Switch 16 Off 051 - Manual Restart Memory Overflow (Zone 91): 000 - MR-2900 panel...
  • Page 375 MR-2900 Programming Manual 5.0 Appendix B: Stand-by Battery Calculation 5.1 General Batteries are designed and manufactured for a specific use. "Standby" is one of these uses. They are rated according to their ability to deliver a steady current for 20 hours ("20 Hour Rating"). A 10 Ah battery is unable to deliver 10 A for 1 hour, however it will deliver ½...
  • Page 376 MR-2900 Programming Manual 5.2 Sample Calculation The current draw of any other devices, such as detectors, addressable modules, will also have to be included in the calculations. This would include any devices connected to the two Aux Power connections. A typical calculation for 24 hour stand-by operation plus 5 minutes of signalling device operation would be: Board/Device Draw (mA)
  • Page 377 MR-2900 Programming Manual 6.0 Appendix C: Service Terminal The MR-2900 Control Unit, MR-2909 Addressable Input Module and MR-2919 Addressable Input Module will display information and accept commands via the service terminal port. The information includes initiating circuit configuration, current status of bell, relays, etc., diagnostic information, the archive, etc.
  • Page 378 MR-2900 Programming Manual Screen Name Description Bells Displays the current status of the bell circuits. Also shows the timers and settings for the cut-off. See screen 11 for acceptable supervision values. See screen 39 for addressable bells. Function Relays Displays the current settings and timers for the 4 function relays. Releasers Displays the current settings and timers for the releasing circuits (if any).
  • Page 379 MR-2900 Programming Manual Screen Name Description Printer Status Displays the current printer status. Network Displays information about network communications. This includes frames sent and received, frames in error and orphan messages. Orphan message destruction is subject to the timers shown. Commands 0 V Clear counters on screen Port 1...
  • Page 380 MR-2900 Programming Manual Screen Name Description Addressable Connect to the Addressable Module controlling circuits 17 to 24 if 17..24 it exists. Press <Esc> to return to the Control Panel screens. Notes for Screens 31 to 33: 1. The keyboard commands (see below) are not available. 2.
  • Page 381 MR-2900 Programming Manual Screen Name Description FIFO This screen is restricted to Privilege Level 1 and above. Displays the FIFO memory usage of various system tasks. This diagnostic screen needs to be consulted if the panel has a Memory Overflow trouble. The first line shows the total FIFO space and the largest amount any one task has used.
  • Page 382 MR-2900 Programming Manual Command Description (month).(date).(year) D Enter the date and year. The year may be entered as 00 to 99 in a two-digit format, or as 1991 to 2090 in a four- digit format. (hours).(minutes) T Set the time. (hours).(minutes).(seconds) T Set the time.
  • Page 383 MR-2900 Programming Manual Screen Name Description Detail For a single device, shows all the programming, analog values, status and commands sent. Type On-Line For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying all the devices that are actually on the circuit. Type Assigned For a single circuit, shows a grid displaying all the devices that are programmed to be on the circuit.
  • Page 384 MR-2900 Programming Manual Command Description 0<Tab> View Index screen showing the numbers of all available screens. 0-127<Tab> View selected screen. If selected screen is unused/ unavailable, the next available screen is shown. Display next address. (0-199)A Display selected address. Display next circuit. (1-24)C Display selected circuit.
  • Page 385 MR-2900 Programming Manual 7.0 Appendix D: Table of Reporting Codes The following tables contain automatic Contact ID and SIA format reporting codes. Contact ID: The first digit (in parentheses) will automatically be sent by the control. The second two digits are to indicate specific information about the signal. For example, if zone 1 is a fire zone, you could program the event code as [1A].
  • Page 386 MR-2900 Programming Manual Contact SIA Auto Dialer ID Auto Reporting Code Code sent when... Rep. Direction* Rep. Codes Codes Walk Test Start/ control panel has entered/exited walk MA/R (6) A7 TS-000/ Stop test mode; no TE-000 events will be communicated Test test transmission...
  • Page 387 No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron. Canada Secutron Inc. 60 Industrial Parkway...
  • Page 388 M R - 2 9 0 0 Fire Alarm Control Unit PERATOR’S ANUAL Revision D Document #: LT-2012 WARNING: This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
  • Page 389 Secutron Inc. Secutron Inc. 25 Interchange Way Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3 Please call us at 1-888-695-3545 if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
  • Page 390 MR-2900 Operator’s Manual Contents 1.0 Unit Operation ............................1 1.1 Power Up Sequence ........................1 1.2 Types of Inputs ..........................1 1.3 Status Display ..........................2 1.4 Zone LEDs ............................. 2 1.5 Buzzer............................. 2 1.6 Operator Keys..........................3 1.7 Alarm List ............................6 1.8 LCD and Keypad..........................
  • Page 391 MR-2900 Operator’s Manual...
  • Page 392 MR-2900 Operator’s Manual 1.0 Unit Operation The operation of the MR1 and MR2 programs are almost identical. This chapter applies to both programs. Those functions that are different are noted. 1.1 Power Up Sequence The power up sequence of the panel is started in the following ways: power is applied to the panel; the hard reboot button at the top of the Inner Door is pressed;...
  • Page 393 MR-2900 Operator’s Manual • Non-Reporting: These are non-latching inputs. They are also referred to as Non-Fire. There is no requirement that these inputs cause any action whatsoever. They use the supervisory LED for annunciation. They can operate only relays and control modules. The LEDs, relays and control modules will follow the non-reporting input's status.
  • Page 394 MR-2900 Operator’s Manual • Medium: This indicates any new supervisory conditions. The pattern is 200ms on/off. • Slow: This indicates any new trouble conditions. The pattern in 500ms on/off. 1.6 Operator Keys These are located below the Status Display. They are not visible through the front door. There are Figure 2: Fixed Key Assignments Figure 1: Default Key Assignments 12 keys, each with a yellow and green LED (some keys may have red instead of yellow LEDs).
  • Page 395 MR-2900 Operator’s Manual Action System System Reset resets part or all of the system. Reset • The green LED flashes when the system, or part of the system, can be reset. • The yellow LED flashes when there are conventional smoke detector circuits in alarm.
  • Page 396 MR-2900 Operator’s Manual Action Test Mode Places panel into test mode. Press again to return to normal mode. The yellow LED will flash while in test mode. This function can be set to Privilege Level 0 or 1. It follows the Disconnect privilege level (set in MHI). During test mode, the remote annunciator zone LEDs becomes non-latching for the zone(s) under test.
  • Page 397 MR-2900 Operator’s Manual Action Switch n Off Change the state of the software switch n between Auto and Off. The yellow LED will flash while the switch is forced Off. The green LED will flash whenever the switch is off, either automatically or forced. Switches can affect relays, control modules and LEDs.
  • Page 398 MR-2900 Operator’s Manual The event screen of an entry shows one of two forms: Line 1: time, sequence number, and Condition Code Line 2: date and Zone Number Line 4: description of event (alarm, trouble, ground, restore, etc.) or 2) Line 1: time, sequence number, and Condition Code Line 2: date and Zone Number Line 3: description of event Line 4: circuit/device type...
  • Page 399 MR-2900 Operator’s Manual programmed device on that circuit will be displayed. If <Enter> is pressed without any entry, the first addressable device will be displayed. <Clear> will remove any values entered. If there is no value entered, <Clear> will return to the Status Menu. If the selected device is not in the database, the next device in the database is shown.
  • Page 400 MR-2900 Operator’s Manual a second screen including information from the database. You can start by looking at either the last event (newest) or the first event (oldest). When viewing the events, scroll to the next one using the <Right Arrow> or the previous one with the <Left Arrow>. <Enter>...
  • Page 401 MR-2900 Operator’s Manual 1.9 Silent Walk Test The Silent Walk Test allows for single person testing of the system. This is done by providing an audio output that can be used by a radio with a microphone input. The system will produce tones through the audio output jack to give the inspector a positive indication of system behaviour.

  • Page 402: Diagnostic Leds

    MR-2900 Operator’s Manual 2.0 Supplementary Information 2.1 Diagnostic LEDs There are 6 LEDs in the middle of the right edge of the Inner Door Assembly for diagnostic purposes. They are used as follows: 1. extended memory in use 2. addressable database in use 3.
  • Page 403 MR-2900 Operator’s Manual Zone Number PPP:ZZ.SSS Format: Control Panel Number Panel Zone Panel Panel Description Description Zone Zone General Alarm Comlink 3 Initiating Circuit 1 Comlink 6 Initiating Circuit 2 Printer Port Initiating Circuit 3 Addressable Modules Comlink Initiating Circuit 4 Output (bell/releaser) Supervision Initiating Circuit 5...
  • Page 404 MR-2900 Operator’s Manual Smoke Detector and Contact Device Circuit: 000 - Wiring Fault 001 - Smoke Detector 002 - Contact Device Comlink 1 (Zone 51): Unit Network ID number Comlink 3 (Zone 53): Unit ID number Note: Only MR-2614, MR-2644, MR2801-MR and MR-2806-MR use IDs other than 000. Addressable Module Comlink (Zone 59): 001 - Circuits 1 to 8 002 - Circuits 9 to 16...
  • Page 405 MR-2900 Operator’s Manual Message Description The memory chip containing the configuration information is not working EEPROM failure correctly. It will need to be erased. This requires a Level 9 passcode. Erasing the EEPROM will lose ALL information in the EEPROM. This includes the configuration information, the panel serial number and the archive.
  • Page 406 MR-2900 Operator’s Manual Message Description List the status of the 8 bell circuits and the 2 auxiliary power circuits. BBBBBBBBAA Each column represents one circuit. A dot (.) indicates a normal 1234567812 condition, an S indicates a short, an O indicates an open and a G ..
  • Page 407 The extended memory lockout has timed out. The panel will need a memory lockout Hard Reboot to correct this problem. Please notify Secutron of the occurrence of this error. Include in your report the panel serial number and the name, date and time of the operating program.
  • Page 408 MR-2900 Operator’s Manual Message Description One or more of the addressable input circuit modules have been coprocessor class changed from either Class A or B to the other. Reboot the panel to clear changed this trouble. The operating program requires more extend RAM then the panel not enough ram actually has.
  • Page 409 No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron. Canada Secutron Inc. 60 Industrial Parkway...
  • Page 410 M R - 2 6 0 2 Fire Alarm Control Unit NSTALLATION ANUAL Revision: B Document #: LT-2015 WARNING: This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
  • Page 411 Secutron Inc. Secutron Inc. 25 Interchange Way Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3 Please call us at 1-888-SECUTRON (1-888-732-8876) if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
  • Page 412 Cautions and Warnings READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depends upon proper installation. DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED. Upon unpacking your equipment, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage.
  • Page 413 MR-2602 Installation& Operator’s Manual Contents 1.0 Introduction .............................. 1 1.1 The MR-2602 Fire Alarm Control Unit .................... 1 1.2 Codes, Standards and Installation Requirements................1 1.3 Technical Support and General Information ................... 2 1.4 System Verification ......................... 2 1.5 Standby Power..........................2 2.0 Preparing to Install the MR-2602 Fire Panel ....................
  • Page 414 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual 9.0 Appendix: Table of Compatible Smoke Detectors ................... 37 9.1 Smoke Detector Bases ........................39 9.2 Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors....................39 9.3 Compatible Horns/Strobes......................40 FCC Compliance Statement .......................... 42 Warranty and Warning Information ........................ 43 Warning Please Read Carefully......................

  • Page 415: The Mr-2602 Fire Alarm Control Unit

    MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual 1.0 Introduction 1.1 The MR-2602 Fire Alarm Control Unit General features • Two initiating device circuits, class B / style B • Two notification appliance circuits, class B / style Y (Power Limited) [can be wired as one NAC, class A / style Z] •...
  • Page 416 1.3 Technical Support and General Information For technical support call 1-888-SECUTRON, or email techsupport@secutron.com. For general product information visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com. 1.4 System Verification The complete fire alarm system must be verified for proper installation and operation when: •...

  • Page 417: Preparing To Install The Mr-2602 Fire Panel

    MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual 2.0 Preparing to Install the MR-2602 Fire Panel 2.1 Unpacking the MR-2602 The basic MR-2602 package includes the following components: • Cabinet with hinged door • Display and control plate c/w display and control printed circuit board. •...
  • Page 418 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual Model Number Name Description MR-2605-SR EOL supervision relay Supervises the extended power wiring typically used for installations that employ 4-wire smoke detectors. Mounts in the field. MRD-EOL4.7K EOLR End-of-Line resistor for NAC and Initiating circuits. Mounts in the field. MRD-MP400 EOLR plate Single gang plate with EOL resistor.

  • Page 419: Mr-2602 Overview

    MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual 2.3 MR-2602 Overview Figure 1: MR-2602 cabinet with door closed Figure 2: MR-2602 display and controls Zone Label Insert A zone label insert is installed in the zone window area. Reach behind the display/control panel and remove the blank insert.
  • Page 420 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual 2.4 Planning Your Installation This system should be installed and serviced by qualified fire alarm installation professionals. As a minimum, the following points should be considered to ensure that the installation will be successful and proceed without delay. •...
  • Page 421 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual 2.6 Module Current Ratings Standby Current Alarm Current Max. Alarm Module (mA) DC (mA) DC Current (mA) DC MR-2602 Control panel 425(*) MR-2605-T Remote trouble indicator MR-2605-AT R.T.I. and remote 20(*) 5 zone annunciator MR-2806 DACT MR-2605-R3 Relay module(**) * Current noted assumes ONE initiating zone is in alarm.
  • Page 422 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual 2.8 Calculation for Standby Battery Requirement Total Total Current Number Standby Alarm Step Device per device Current Current (mA) device (mA) (mA) MR-2602 Standby: = 90 Alarm: Zone 1 Standby: Alarm: Zone 2 Standby: Alarm: NAC 1 Alarm: NAC 2...

  • Page 423: Installing The Mr-2602 Fire Panel

    MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual 3.0 Installing the MR-2602 Fire Panel 3.1 Environmental Specifications Consider the following conditions when selecting a mounting location for the MR-2602 panel: • Operating temperature: 32°F to 122°F / 0°C to 50°C • Humidity: 95% RH non-condensing •...
  • Page 424 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual 3.3 Mounting the MR-2602 Mounting Dimensions Dimensions in inches Knockout Locations...
  • Page 425 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual 4.0 Wiring the MR-2602 4.1 Wiring Specifications MR-2602 Terminal Descriptions Terminal Description Label NAC 1 Notification Appliance Circuit # 1 (+, –) 24 V , Full-Wave Rectified voltage, 1.5 Amps max. Programmable as Steady or Temporal output on alarm.
  • Page 426 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual Terminal Description Label ALM NC Common Alarm relay, Normally Closed contact The Common Alarm relay is normally de-energized. Contact is shown in the de-energized state. Contacts are rated 30 V , 2 Amps max. Zone 1 positive input Zone 1 negative input Zone output is 24 V nominal to power 2-wire smoke...
  • Page 427 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual Connecting 4-Wire Smoke Detectors 1. Program as zone type 01, instant or 05, 4-wire smoke auto-verify. When programmed as type 05, do not mix 2-wire smoke detectors or contacts from other alarm initiating devices on the zone. 2.
  • Page 428 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual NAC Wiring Chart Maximum 18-Awg Wire 16-Awg Wire 14-Awg Wire 12-Awg Wire Maximum Total Current Loop (ohms) 8.00 0.25 1,538 2,500 5.00 0.50 1,250 2.70 0.75 2.00 1.00 1.60 1.25 1.30 1.50 Note: This chart is based on a minimum source voltage of 22 volts and a maximum line loss of 2 volts thus leaving a minimum of 20 volts at the last notification appliance.
  • Page 429 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual Connecting Optional Devices See installation sheets for the remote devices for detailed wiring and address setup. 1. Maximum of 4 MR-2605-T per panel. 2. Maximum of 4 MR-2605-AT per panel. Secur-bus Wiring Chart 22-awg Wire 18-awg Wire 16-awg Wire 14-awg Wire...
  • Page 430 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual Secur-bus Capacitance Maximum wire capacitance for proper operation of the Secur-bus is 90 nF (nanofarad). Typical wire capacitance for 22 awg quad cable is 20 nF per 1,000 feet. Thus, for 22 awg quad cable, the maximum wire run distance is ((90/20)×...
  • Page 431 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual 5.0 Panel Operation 5.1 Operating Sequences This section describes how the panel functions under various conditions. The choices you make in panel programming will also affect how the panel operates. Please see “6.0 Programming the MR-2602 System”...
  • Page 432 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual 5.4 Supervisory Zone Alarms When an alarm occurs on a supervisory zone (type 04), the corresponding zone supervisory LED begins flashing. The common supervisory LED and supervisory relay (supervisory relay is optional) turn on steady, and the buzzer turns on steady. If there was a trouble on that zone, the zone trouble LED turns off.
  • Page 433 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual System Troubles Common Trouble System faults Trouble Buzzer Other Indicators Relay Alarm zone open circuit – loss turns on sounds ½ deactivates Zone trouble LED of EOLR second on/ turns on steady NAC open circuit or short turns on sounds ½...
  • Page 434 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual 5.6 System Reset Operation To reset the system, press the ‘Reset System’ button. The panel will remove all power from the zones and the switched auxiliary relay for 10 seconds. During this 10 second period, the buzzer will beep twice every 2 seconds.
  • Page 435 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual 5.8 Walk Test (Installer function only) To do a walk test, all zone alarms, troubles and relays must be in their normal state. You can program the walk test to be either audible or silent (see “Audible Walk Test” on page 29). 1.
  • Page 436 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual 5.9 NAC operation See also “NAC Temporal/Steady Programming - Section 1 (‘NAC1’ LED on steady)” on page 28, and “NAC Auto-silence and Strobe Programming - Section 2 (‘NAC2’ LED on steady)” on page 29 for more information. Class ‘B’...

  • Page 437: Programming The Mr-2602 System

    MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual 6.0 Programming the MR-2602 System 6.1 How to Program the MR-2602 You can program the panel using the controls and indicator LEDs. There are no DIP switches to set for programming. Once programmed, the operating modes selected are maintained in non-volatile memory that will retain the programmed information even if all power is removed from the panel.
  • Page 438 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual When you first enter programming mode, the panel will be at zone programming (section 0). Each programming section has one or more programming sub-sections (e.g. section 0 has sub-sections for zones 1 through 5). Use the Silence Trouble and Silence Alarm buttons to enter your programming choices: 1.
  • Page 439 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual 6.2 Programming Section Descriptions Zone Programming (Section 0) In this zone programming section, the panel uses the zone alarm, supervisory, and trouble LEDs to indicate the programming as follows: Zone type 00 – Null zone (Not used) The zone is not used.
  • Page 440 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual Zone type 02 - Auto-Verify for 2-wire smoke detectors Zone type 02 can distinguish between 2-wire smoke detector activation and contact activation. This allows you to have manual pullstations and smoke detectors on the same 2-wire zone. With this zone type, smoke detector activation starts the auto-verify sequence, and a contact closure (pullstation activation) initiates an immediate alarm.
  • Page 441 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual Zone type 03 – Waterflow zone This zone type is intended for waterflow alarm initiating contact devices only. Do not mix other alarm initiating devices on this zone. You can set the panel to include a fixed timer that will delay all ‘Waterflow’...
  • Page 442 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual Zone type 05 – Auto-verify for four-wire smoke detectors This zone type is intended for the alarm initiating contacts from 4-wire smoke detectors only and provides the ability to auto- verify alarms from those smoke detectors. CAUTION: Do not mix alarm initiating or supervisory initiating devices on the same zone with 4-wire smoke detector alarm initiating contacts.
  • Page 443 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual NAC Auto-silence and Strobe Programming - Section 2 (‘NAC2’ LED on steady) Automatic Signal Silence If Automatic Signal Silence is enabled, 30 minutes after the last fire alarm on the system, the panel restores the NACs to normal (alarms are silenced).
  • Page 444 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual Waterflow Programming - Section 4 (‘Ground Fault’ LED on steady) Delay Waterflow Alarms If the Waterflow Alarm Delay option is turned on, the panel will start a 60 second timer when the first Waterflow zone goes into alarm.
  • Page 445 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual Reset Section Programming (All common trouble LEDs flashing) To Enter this Programming Section 1. Enter the installer programming mode, section 0 2. Press and hold the System Reset button for 2 seconds. The Z1 ALM LED and TRB LED will be ON and all the System Trouble LEDs will flash.
  • Page 446 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual Display Event Flashing Zone X Alarm LED and Flashing Unverified Zone X Alarm Zone X Supervisory LED Flashing Zone X Supervisory LED Zone X Supervisory Steady Zone X Supervisory LED Zone X Supervisory Restore Flashing Zone X Trouble LED Zone X Trouble Steady Zone X Trouble LED Zone X Trouble Restore...
  • Page 447 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual 7.0 Startup of the MR-2602 7.1 Prior to power up • Verify that all field wiring is free of shorts, opens and grounds and that end-of-line devices are connected and are the proper value. • Verify that all modules and internal cables are properly seated in their location.
  • Page 448 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual 8.0 Programming Worksheets 8.1 Entering Programming Mode Please see “6.0 Programming the MR-2602 System” on page 23 for complete instructions. All zone alarms must be reset prior to entering the programming mode. While the panel is in the programming mode, the annunciators will show a trouble condition.
  • Page 449 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual 8.2 Zone Programming (Section 0) Program each of the zones as one of the following types. (See “Zone Programming (Section 0)” on page 25.) Record your programming choices in the table below. ZONE Zone Type ALARM Label (00 - 05)
  • Page 450 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual 8.5 Silence Inhibit and Walk Test Programming (Section 3) Please see “Silence Inhibit and Walk Test Programming - Section 3 (‘Battery’ LED on steady)” on page 29. Settings ZONE ALARM Programming Section LED On Signal Silence Inhibit Timer Enabled *Disabled One Man Walk Test...

  • Page 451: 9.0 Appendix: Table Of Compatible Smoke Detectors

    MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual 9.0 Appendix: Table of Compatible Smoke Detectors Panel Max. # Model Base Manufacturer Model Base Description Detectors System Sensor 1400/ Ionization type 1400A smoke, 2-wire 12/24V System Sensor 1451 B401 Plug-in – B401B Ionization type smoke detector System Sensor 2400...
  • Page 452 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual Panel Max. # Model Base Manufacturer Model Base Description Detectors System 2112/24T Photoelectric, Sensor 12/24V terminal strip System 4451HT B401 Plug-in – High Sensor 4451HTA B401B Temp Heat DH400 88°C (190°F) System 5451 B401 Plug-in – Fixed Sensor B401B Temp/Rate of...

  • Page 453: 9.1 Smoke Detector Bases

    MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual 9.1 Smoke Detector Bases Max. # Base Manufacturer Model Description Detectors System B401 2-wire standard base, 4”, 12/24V Sensor System B401B 2-wire standard base, 6”, 12/24V Sensor System B406B 2-wire base, 24V , form contact Sensor System B401BH...

  • Page 454: 9.3 Compatible Horns/Strobes

    MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual 9.3 Compatible Horns/Strobes Voltage System Sensor Type (FWR) P2415(W)(A) 20-30 P241575(W)(A) 15/75 20-30 P2475(W)(A) 20-30 P24110(W)(A) 20-30 S2415(W)(A) 20-30 S241575(W)(A) 15/75 20-30 S2475(W)(A) 20-30 S24110(W)(A) 20-30 H24(W)(A) 20-30 MDL(W)(A) Module 20-30 No suffix = Red, suffix W = White, suffix A = Canadian version Voltage Gentex...
  • Page 455 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual Voltage Wheelock Type (FWR) NS-2415W-FR(W) 20-31 NS-241575W-FR(W) 15/75 20-31 NS-2430W-FR(W) 20-31 NS-2475W-FR(W) 20-31 NS-24110W-FR(W) 20-31 NS4-2415W-FR(W) 20-31 NS4-241575W-FR(W) 15/75 20-31 NS4-2430W-FR(W) 20-31 NS4-2475W-FR(W) 20-31 NS4-24110W-FR(W) 20-31 NS = 2-wire, NS4 = 4-wire AS-2415W-FR(W) 20-31 AS-241575W-FR(W) 15/75 20-31 AS-2430W-FR(W)

  • Page 456: Fcc Compliance Statement

    MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual FCC Compliance Statement CAUTION: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void your authority to use this equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

  • Page 457: Warranty And Warning Information

    MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual Warranty & Warning Information Warning Please Read Carefully Note to End Users: This equipment is subject to terms and conditions of sale as follows: Note to Installers This warning contains vital information. As the only individual in contact with system users, it is your responsibility to bring each item in this warning to the attention of the users of this system.
  • Page 458 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual properly detect a fire condition or signal the control panel to alert occupants of a fire condition for a number of reasons, such as: the smoke detectors or heat detector may have been improperly installed or positioned; smoke or heat may not be able to reach the alarm initiating device, such as when the fire is in a chimney, walls or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors;...
  • Page 459 MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual IMPORTANT NOTE: End-users of the system must take care to ensure that the system, batteries, telephone lines, etc. are tested and examined on a regular basis to ensure the minimization of system failure.

  • Page 460: Limited Warranty

    MR-2602 Installation & Operator’s Manual Limited Warranty warrants the original purchaser that for a period of two years from the date of manufacture, the product shall be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. During the warranty period, shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials.
  • Page 461 SECUTRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO ITS GOODS DELIVERED, NOR IS THERE ANY OTHER WARRANTY,...
  • Page 462 Notes...
  • Page 463 No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron. Canada U.S.A 25 Interchange Way...
  • Page 464 M R - 2 6 0 5 Fire Alarm Control Unit NSTALLATION ANUAL Revision A Document #: LT-2016 WARNING: This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
  • Page 465 Secutron Inc. Secutron Inc. 25 Interchange Way Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3 Please call us at 1-888-SECUTRON (1-888-732-8876) if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
  • Page 466 Cautions and Warnings READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depends upon proper installation. DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED. Upon unpacking your equipment, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage.
  • Page 467 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual Contents 1.0 Introduction .............................. 1 1.1 The MR-2605 Fire Alarm Control Unit .................... 1 1.2 Codes, Standards and Installation Requirements................1 1.3 Technical Support and General Information ................... 2 1.4 System Verification ......................... 2 1.5 Standby Power..........................2 2.0 Preparing to Install the MR-2605 Fire Panel ....................
  • Page 468 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 9.0 Appendix: Table of Compatible Smoke Detectors ................... 38 9.1 Smoke Detector Bases ........................40 9.2 Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors....................40 9.3 Compatible Horns/Strobes......................41 FCC Compliance Statement .......................... 43 Warranty and Warning Information ........................ 44 Warning Please Read Carefully......................
  • Page 469 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 1.0 Introduction 1.1 The MR-2605 Fire Alarm Control Unit General features • Five initiating device circuits, class B / style B • Two notification appliance circuits, class B / style Y (Power Limited) [can be wired as one NAC, class A / style Z] •...
  • Page 470 1.3 Technical Support and General Information For technical support call 1-888-SECUTRON, or email techsupport@secutron.com. For general product information visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com. 1.4 System Verification The complete fire alarm system must be verified for proper installation and operation when: •...
  • Page 471 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 2.0 Preparing to Install the MR-2605 Fire Panel 2.1 Unpacking the MR-2605 The basic MR-2605 package includes the following components: • Cabinet with hinged door • Display and control plate c/w display and control printed circuit board. •...
  • Page 472 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 2.2 Optional Accessories Model Number Name Description MR-2605-R3 Relay module Provides 3 relays that are jumper programmable to activate on common ‘alarm’, ‘supervisory’ or ‘trouble’. Mounts inside the enclosure and plugs into the main board. MR-2806 Dual line dialer Communicates all alarms, supervisory and...
  • Page 473 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 2.3 MR-2605 Overview Figure 1: MR-2605 cabinet with door closed Figure 2: MR-2605 display and controls Zone Label Insert A zone label insert is installed in the zone window area. Reach behind the display/control panel and remove the blank insert. Zone designations can be written directly on the insert or can be created using Word for Windows, printed on Avery label #5167 and applied to the insert.
  • Page 474 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 2.4 Planning Your Installation This system should be installed and serviced by qualified fire alarm installation professionals. As a minimum, the following points should be considered to ensure that the installation will be successful and proceed without delay. •...
  • Page 475 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 2.6 Module Current Ratings Standby Current Alarm Current Max. Alarm Module (mA) DC (mA) DC Current (mA) DC MR-2605 Control panel 475(*) MR-2605-T Remote trouble indicator MR-2605-AT R.T.I. and 20(*) remote 5 zone annunciator MR-2806 DACT MR-2605-R3 Relay module(**) * Current noted assumes ONE initiating zone is in alarm.
  • Page 476 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 2.8 Calculation for Standby Battery Requirement Current Total Total Number Standby Alarm Step Device device Current Current device (mA) (mA) (mA) MR-2605 Standby: = 130 Alarm: Zone 1 Standby: Alarm: Zone 2 Standby: Alarm: Zone 3 Standby: Alarm: Zone 4...
  • Page 477 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual Current Total Total Number Standby Alarm Step Device device Current Current device (mA) (mA) (mA) Select ‘alarm’ time required (.08): Alarm Amp-Hr. - multiply 6 × 9 = (Amps × Hr.): Amp-Hr. Total Amp-Hr = standby Amp-Hr (8) + alarm Amp-Hr. (10): Amp-Hr.
  • Page 478 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 3.0 Installing the MR-2605 Fire Panel 3.1 Environmental Specifications Consider the following conditions when selecting a mounting location for the MR-2605 panel: • Operating temperature: 32°F to 122°F / 0°C to 50°C • Humidity: 95% RH non-condensing •...
  • Page 479 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 3.3 Mounting the MR-2605 Mounting Dimensions Dimensions in inches Knockout Locations...
  • Page 480 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 4.0 Wiring the MR-2605 4.1 Wiring Specifications MR-2605 Terminal Descriptions Terminal Description Label NAC 1 Notification Appliance Circuit # 1 (+, –) 24 V , Full-Wave Rectified voltage, 1.5 Amps max. Programmable as Steady or Temporal output on alarm.
  • Page 481 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual Terminal Description Label ALM NC Common Alarm relay, Normally Closed contact The Common Alarm relay is normally de-energized. Contact is shown in the de-energized state. Contacts are rated 30 V , 2 Amps max. Zone 1 positive input Zone 1 negative input Zone output is 24 V nominal to power 2-wire smoke...
  • Page 482 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual Connecting 4-Wire Smoke Detectors 1. Program as zone type 01, instant or 05, 4-wire smoke auto-verify. When programmed as type 05, do not mix 2-wire smoke detectors or contacts from other alarm initiating devices on the zone. 2.
  • Page 483 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual NAC Wiring Chart Maximum 18-Awg Wire 16-Awg Wire 14-Awg Wire 12-Awg Wire Maximum Total Current Loop (ohms) 8.00 0.25 1,538 2,500 5.00 0.50 1,250 2.70 0.75 2.00 1.00 1.60 1.25 1.30 1.50 Note: This chart is based on a minimum source voltage of 22 volts and a maximum line loss of 2 volts thus leaving a minimum of 20 volts at the last notification appliance.
  • Page 484 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual Connecting Optional Devices See installation sheets for the remote devices for detailed wiring and address setup. 1. Maximum of 4 MR-2605-T per panel. 2. Maximum of 4 MR-2605-AT per panel. Secur-bus Wiring Chart 22-awg Wire 18-awg Wire 16-awg Wire 14-awg Wire...
  • Page 485 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual To calculate the wire run distance for any gauge wire and any maximum current value, use the following formula: Rmax = 1.25 ohms Imax Amps Distance = Rmax × 1,000 feet 2(wire resistance in ohms per 1,000 feet) Secur-bus Capacitance Maximum wire capacitance for proper operation of the Secur-bus is 90 nF (nanofarad).
  • Page 486 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 5.0 Panel Operation 5.1 Operating Sequences This section describes how the panel functions under various conditions. The choices you make in panel programming will also affect how the panel operates. Please see “6.0 Programming the MR-2605 System”...
  • Page 487 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual Waterflow alarms may be delayed by 60 seconds to prevent false alarms from surges in the sprinkler system. The delay is common to all zones programmed as ‘waterflow’, type 03 zones. If the delay is not used, all waterflow alarms will be instant. 5.4 Supervisory Zone Alarms When an alarm occurs on a supervisory zone (type 04), the corresponding zone supervisory LED begins flashing.
  • Page 488 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual System Troubles Common Trouble System faults Trouble Buzzer Other Indicators Relay Alarm zone open circuit – loss turns on sounds ½ deactivates Zone trouble LED of EOLR second on/ turns on steady NAC open circuit or short turns on sounds ½...
  • Page 489 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 5.6 System Reset Operation To reset the system, press the ‘Reset System’ button. The panel will remove all power from the zones and the switched auxiliary relay for 10 seconds. During this 10 second period, the buzzer will beep twice every 2 seconds.
  • Page 490 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 5.8 Walk Test (Installer function only) To do a walk test, all zone alarms, troubles and relays must be in their normal state. You can program the walk test to be either audible or silent (see “Audible Walk Test” on page 30). 1.
  • Page 491 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 5.9 NAC operation See also “Steady” on page 29, and “NAC Auto-silence and Strobe Programming - Section 2 (‘NAC2’ LED on steady)” on page 29 for more information. Class ‘B’ operation selections: • Steady (default) – On alarm the NAC will turn on steady. It will turn off on either a manual or automatic signal silence.
  • Page 492 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 6.0 Programming the MR-2605 System 6.1 How to Program the MR-2605 You can program the panel using the controls and indicator LEDs. There are no DIP switches to set for programming. Once programmed, the operating modes selected are maintained in non-volatile memory that will retain the programmed information even if all power is removed from the panel.
  • Page 493 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual When you first enter programming mode, the panel will be at zone programming (section 0). Each programming section has one or more programming sub-sections (e.g. section 0 has sub-sections for zones 1 through 5). Use the Silence Trouble and Silence Alarm buttons to enter your programming choices: 1.
  • Page 494 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 6.2 Programming Section Descriptions Zone Programming (Section 0) In this zone programming section, the panel uses the zone alarm, supervisory, and trouble LEDs to indicate the programming as follows: Zone type 00 – Null zone (Not used) The zone is not used.
  • Page 495 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual Zone type 02 - Auto-Verify for 2-wire smoke detectors Zone type 02 can distinguish between 2-wire smoke detector activation and contact activation. This allows you to have manual pullstations and smoke detectors on the same 2-wire zone. With this zone type, smoke detector activation starts the auto-verify sequence, and a contact closure (pullstation activation) initiates an immediate alarm.
  • Page 496 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual Zone type 03 – Waterflow zone This zone type is intended for waterflow alarm initiating contact devices only. Do not mix other alarm initiating devices on this zone. You can set the panel to include a fixed timer that will delay all ‘Waterflow’ type zone alarms for 60 seconds.
  • Page 497 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual Zone type 05 – Auto-verify for four-wire smoke detectors. This zone type is intended for the alarm initiating contacts from 4-wire smoke detectors only and provides the ability to auto-verify alarms from those smoke detectors. CAUTION: Do not mix alarm initiating or supervisory initiating devices on the same zone with 4-wire smoke detector alarm initiating contacts.
  • Page 498 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual NAC2 Strobe If this option is enabled, on alarm, NAC2 turns on steady and does not turn off on automatic signal silence, or when the Silence Alarm button is pressed. When NAC2 is set to this mode, it can only be turned off when all zone fire alarms are restored, and the system is reset.
  • Page 499 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual Silence Waterflow Alarms If the Silence Waterflow Alarms option is turned on, Waterflow zones can be silenced whether the zones are physically restored or not. If the Silence Waterflow Alarms option is turned off, Waterflow zones cannot be silenced until they are physically restored.
  • Page 500 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 6.3 Viewing the Event Buffer 1. Enter the programming mode by pressing and holding the Walk Test switch for 2 seconds. 2. Press any switch. To silence the trouble buzzer and enter the Section 0 programming. 3.
  • Page 501 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual Display Event Flashing Signal Silenced Trouble LED Manual Signal Silence Steady Signal Silenced Trouble LED (Successful) Reset Flashing AC On LED AC Failure Steady AC On LED AC Fail Restore Steady AC On LED and Steady BAT TRB Cold Start Flashing AC On LED and Flashing BAT Warm Start...
  • Page 502 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 7.0 Startup of the MR-2605 7.1 Prior to power up • Verify that all field wiring is free of shorts, opens and grounds and that end-of-line devices are connected and are the proper value. • Verify that all modules and internal cables are properly seated in their location.
  • Page 503 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 8.0 Programming Worksheets 8.1 Entering Programming Mode Please see “6.0 Programming the MR-2605 System” on page 24 for complete instructions. All zone alarms must be reset prior to entering the programming mode. While the panel is in the programming mode, the annunciators will show a trouble condition.
  • Page 504 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 8.2 Zone Programming (Section 0) Program each of the zones as one of the following types. (See “Zone Programming (Section 0)” on page 26.) Record your programming choices in the table below. ZONE Zone Type ALARM Label (00 - 05)
  • Page 505 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 8.4 NAC Auto-silence, Strobe Programming (Section 2) Please see “NAC Auto-silence and Strobe Programming - Section 2 (‘NAC2’ LED on steady)” on page 29. Settings ZONE ALARM Programming Section LED On NAC Auto-silence Enabled *Disabled NAC2 Strobe or Bell Strobe *Bell...
  • Page 506 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 8.7 Auto-Verify Programming (Section 5) Please see “Auto-Verify Programming - Section 5 (‘Signals Silence’ LED on steady)” on page 31. Settings ZONE ALARM LED Programming Section Auto-verify faults are alarms or *Alarms Troubles troubles * = Factory default...

  • Page 507: 9.0 Appendix: Table Of Compatible Smoke Detectors

    MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 9.0 Appendix: Table of Compatible Smoke Detectors Panel Max. # Model Base Manufacturer Model Base Description Detectors System Sensor 1400/ Ionization type 1400A smoke, 2-wire 12/24V System Sensor 1451 B401 Plug-in – B401B Ionization type smoke detector System Sensor 2400...
  • Page 508 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual Panel Max. # Model Base Manufacturer Model Base Description Detectors System Sensor 4451HT B401 Plug-in – High 4451HTA B401B Temp Heat DH400 88°C (190°F) System Sensor 5451 B401 Plug-in – Fixed B401B Temp/Rate of DH400 Rise Detector System Sensor 1151...

  • Page 509: 9.1 Smoke Detector Bases

    MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 9.1 Smoke Detector Bases Max. # Base Manufacturer Model Description Detectors System B401 2-wire standard base, 4”, 12/24V Sensor System B401B 2-wire standard base, 6”, 12/24V Sensor System B406B 2-wire base, 24V , form contact Sensor System B401BH...

  • Page 510: 9.3 Compatible Horns/Strobes

    MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual 9.3 Compatible Horns/Strobes Voltage System Sensor Type (FWR) P2415(W)(A) 20-30 P241575(W)(A) 15/75 20-30 P2475(W)(A) 20-30 P24110(W)(A) 20-30 S2415(W)(A) 20-30 S241575(W)(A) 15/75 20-30 S2475(W)(A) 20-30 S24110(W)(A) 20-30 H24(W)(A) 20-30 MDL(W)(A) Synch Module 20-30 No suffix = Red, suffix W = White, suffix A = Canadian version Voltage Gentex...
  • Page 511 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual Voltage Wheelock Type (FWR) NS-2415W-FR(W) 20-31 NS-241575W-FR(W) 15/75 20-31 NS-2430W-FR(W) 20-31 NS-2475W-FR(W) 20-31 NS-24110W-FR(W) 20-31 NS4-2415W-FR(W) 20-31 NS4-241575W-FR(W) 15/75 20-31 NS4-2430W-FR(W) 20-31 NS4-2475W-FR(W) 20-31 NS4-24110W-FR(W) 20-31 NS = 2-wire, NS4 = 4-wire AS-2415W-FR(W) 20-31 AS-241575W-FR(W) 15/75 20-31 AS-2430W-FR(W)

  • Page 512: Fcc Compliance Statement

    MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual FCC Compliance Statement CAUTION: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void your authority to use this equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

  • Page 513: Warranty And Warning Information

    MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual Warranty & Warning Information Warning Please Read Carefully Note to End Users: This equipment is subject to terms and conditions of sale as follows: Note to Installers This warning contains vital information. As the only individual in contact with system users, it is your responsibility to bring each item in this warning to the attention of the users of this system.
  • Page 514 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual properly detect a fire condition or signal the control panel to alert occupants of a fire condition for a number of reasons, such as: the smoke detectors or heat detector may have been improperly installed or positioned; smoke or heat may not be able to reach the alarm initiating device, such as when the fire is in a chimney, walls or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors;...
  • Page 515 MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual IMPORTANT NOTE: End-users of the system must take care to ensure that the system, batteries, telephone lines, etc. are tested and examined on a regular basis to ensure the minimization of system failure.

  • Page 516: Limited Warranty

    MR-2605 Installation and Operator’s Manual Limited Warranty warrants the original purchaser that for a period of two years from the date of manufacture, the product shall be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. During the warranty period, shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials.
  • Page 517 SECUTRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO ITS GOODS DELIVERED, NOR IS THERE ANY OTHER WARRANTY,...
  • Page 518 No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron. Canada U.S.A 25 Interchange Way...

  • Page 519: Specifications

    INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Limited Warranty Secutron warrants that for a period of five years from the date of purchase, the product MR-2605-R3 Relay Module shall be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use and that in ful- fillment of any breach of such warranty, Secutron shall, at its option, repair or replace the defective equipment upon return of the equipment to its repair depot.
  • Page 520 MR-2605-R3 RELAY MODULE INSTALLATION Jumper Configuration SUPERVISORY Middle ALARM Use #4-40 screw to secure relayboard to Down nylon spacer. TROUBLE MR-2602 / MR-2605 main board Note: Screw nylon spacer onto this stud. J1= Relay 1 MR-2605-R3 header J2 = Relay 2 pins insert into header J3 = Relay 3 socket on main PC...
  • Page 521 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Limited Warranty Secutron warrants that for a period of five years from the date of purchase, the product MR-2602A/2605A shall be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use and that in ful- fillment of any breach of such warranty, Secutron shall, at its option, repair or replace Class A Zone Input Module the defective equipment upon return of the equipment to its repair depot.
  • Page 522 INSTALLATION he MR-2602A/2605A module mounts in the corresponding MR-2602/2605 fire alarm back box. Refer to Figure 1. 1. Place the supplied spacers (2) on the pem studs. 2. Insert the module header pins into the corresponding Class ‘B’ zone terminals on the main board.
  • Page 523 M R - 2 9 4 4 LCD Remote Annunciator NSTALLATION & PERATING ANUAL Revision D Document #: LT-2020 WARNING: This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be read carefully.
  • Page 524 Secutron Inc. Secutron Inc. 25 Interchange Way Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3 Please call us at 1-888-695-3545 if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
  • Page 525 Cautions and Warnings READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depends upon proper installation. DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED. Upon unpacking your equipment, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage.
  • Page 526 MR-2944 Installation and Operatotr’s Manual Contents 1.0 Technical Information..........................1 1.1 General ............................1 1.2 MR-2915 LED Driver........................1 1.3 MR-2902 Annunciator Strip......................1 1.4 MR-2622 Annunciator Strip......................1 1.5 Technical Specifications ......................... 2 2.0 Installation ..............................3 2.1 Mounting ............................3 2.2 Wiring..............................
  • Page 527 MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual...
  • Page 528 MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual List of Figures Figure 1: Wiring Diagram..........................4 Figure 2: MR-2400 Wiring ..........................4 Figure 3: Operator Key Wiring (Typical) ......................5 Figure 4: MR-2622............................5 Figure 5: MR-2915 LED Pin-Outs........................5 Figure 6: Alarm List Event Screen........................8 Figure 7: Alarm List Message Screen ......................
  • Page 529 MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual...
  • Page 530 MR-2944 can use all variants of the MR-2910 board. The MR-2944 may also use the MR-D1010R Fiber Optic Modem for connecting a fiber network between panels. The MR-2944 uses the AN4 program for connection to MR-2900 and MR-2100/2200 networks and the AN4A program for connection to MR-2400 panels. All programs are nearly identical in operation, but the AN4A program may not be used to create a fiber optic network.
  • Page 531 MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual 1.5 Technical Specifications MR-2944 MR-2622 MR-2915 MR-2902 24 VDC 24 VDC 5 VDC 24 VDC Voltage (Optional) no LCD: 50 mA 5 mA 10 mA 10 mA Normal Current LCD: 75 mA 500 mA 125 mA 250 mA 250 mA Max Current...
  • Page 532 MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual 2.0 Installation 2.1 Mounting These mounting instructions apply only to annunciators that come complete with cabinet. 1. Choose a suitable location for mounting. 2. Mark placement of mounting screws using template. Make sure that the template is level. 3.
  • Page 533 MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual programmed to communicate with the next panel or that COM1 is disabled as required in the downloaded database. COM2 (C2+/C2-) is connected to the previous panel in the network loop. Figure 1: Wiring Diagram Notes: 1.
  • Page 534 MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual keys limited access (see Figure 3). The figure is typical only; any, all or none of the operator keys can have the key switch used. LEDs The MR-2902 Annunciator Strip, MR-2622 Annunciator Strip and the MR-2915 LED Driver are connected to the Annunciator by ribbon cables (see Figure 1).
  • Page 535 MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual 3.0 Operation 3.1 LEDs There are 192 LED zones available on the Annunciator, each zone consisting of Alarm (red), Supervisory (amber) and Trouble (yellow) LEDs. The LEDs will flash if a new condition is received. If the buzzer is sounding, press Acknowledge to silence the buzzer.
  • Page 536 MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual Slow: This indicates any new trouble conditions. The pattern in 500ms on/off. Through programming, a new trouble condition can be made to not sound the buzzer again for a time after it has been silenced. This time can be set from 15 to 255 seconds. By default, the buzzer will sound for all new troubles.
  • Page 537 MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual There are two reset modes of operation: • Automatic: Entries are removed from the Alarm List as soon as the condition restores. • Manual: Entries that can be removed from the list have the condition code shown with a "- "...
  • Page 538 MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual 4.0 Programming 4.1 General The Annunciator Unit's service terminal is accessed through the 9-pin RS-232 serial port located on the bottom of the MR-2944 Driver Board. The programming cable uses pins 2, 3 and 5 straight through from DB9 male to DB9 female plugs.
  • Page 539 MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual Screen Name Description Alarm List List the first entries in the Alarm List. Up to 20 entries will be shown. Level 0 Commands Page down Go to the end of the list Page up 0 K Go to the beginning of the list Miscellaneous List of the current troubles.
  • Page 540 MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual Screen Name Description Clock Show the current clock calibration or calibration status. Stacks This screen is for diagnostic purposes. FIFOs This screen is for diagnostic purposes. Level 0 Commands 0 <Ctrl-F> Clear maximum usage counters Extended Displays the type and amount of extended memory installed in Memory...
  • Page 541 MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual Command Description (hours).(minutes) T Set the time. (hours).(minutes).(seconds) T Set the time. <Ctrl-V> Clear privilege (Set to User Privilege.) (code)<Ctrl-V> Set privilege. (code) is either the Level 1 or Level 2 passcode programmed into the panel.
  • Page 542 MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual 5.0 Parts List Model Description MR-2944 Annunciator Driver MR-2944LC Annunciator Driver c/w 4x20 LCD Display MR-2944LCD Annunciator Driver c/w Double Size 4x20 LCD Display MR-2910 Network Communications Board MR-2910-R1 Network Communications Board, Port 1 RS-232, Port 2 Standard MR-2910-R2 Network Communications Board, Port 1 Standard, Port 2...
  • Page 543 MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual 6.0 Supplementary Information The Alarm List uses the following formats for condition codes and zone numbering. Only those zones that are shown by the Annunciator are listed. 6.1 Condition Code Alarm List Description ALARM Alarm bypass Bypass Comlink...
  • Page 544 MR-2944 Installation and Operator’s Manual Sub-Zone Number Addressable Circuit: Device Number Dual End-of-Line Circuit:000 - Wiring Fault 001 - Switch #1 002 - Switch #2 Smoke Detector and Contact Device Circuit:000 - Wiring Fault 001 - Smoke Detector 002 - Contact Device Comlink 1 (Zone 51): Unit Network ID number Comlink 3 (Zone 53): Unit ID number Comlink 6 (Zone 54): Unit ID number...
  • Page 545 No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron. Canada Secutron Inc. 60 Industrial Parkway...
  • Page 546 M R D L D u a l L i n e D i a l e r NSTALLATION ANUAL Revision B Document #: LT-2021 WARNING: This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer.
  • Page 547 Secutron Inc. Secutron Inc. 25 Interchange Way Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3 Please call us at 1-888-695-3545 if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
  • Page 548 Cautions and Warnings READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depends upon proper installation. DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED. Upon unpacking your equipment, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage.
  • Page 549 MRDL Installation Manual Contents 1.0 Introduction .............................. 1 1.1 General Features of the MRDL....................... 1 1.2 Codes, Standards and Installation Requirements................1 1.3 Technical Support and General Information ................... 1 2.0 Installing and Wiring the MRDL ....................... 3 2.1 Unpacking the MRDL........................3 2.2 Mounting &...
  • Page 550 MRDL Installation Manual...
  • Page 551 MRDL Installation Manual List of Figures Figure 1: MRDL Install Location ........................3 Figure 2: Initial Programmer Screen....................... 5 Figure 3: Panels Screen ..........................5 Figure 4: Dialer Settings Button........................6 Figure 5: Initial Dialer Screen ......................... 6 Figure 6: Dialer Configuration 1........................7 Figure 7: Dialer Configuration 2........................
  • Page 552 MRDL Installation Manual...

  • Page 553: General Features Of The Mrdl

    The MRDL is a dual line dialer that will communicate all alarms, supervisory and trouble conditions to a Central Station using Contact ID, SIA or 10/20 bps communication formats. The MRDL will support the MR-2100 and MR-2200 Fire Panels. The MHI_V21 or greater programmer must be used to program the MRDL Dialer.
  • Page 554 The required capacity of the standby batteries must be calculated using the charts and tables within the MR-2100/MR-2200 Installation Manual for the period as required by national or local codes and standards. Even though the calculation table within the MR-2100/MR-2200 Installation Manual includes a safety margin, lead-acid batteries commonly used for standby can have variable capacity as a result of age and ambient conditions.

  • Page 555: Installing And Wiring The Mrdl

    Installation manual 2.2 Mounting & Wiring the MRDL Note: Ensure that standby calculations are done before installing the dialer. See the MR-2100/ MR-2200 Fire Panel Installation Manual for all power information and calculation charts. The current rating for the MRDL is: •...

  • Page 556: Mrdl Operation

    MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual 3.0 MRDL Operation 3.1 LED Indicators The dialer’s operating status is visible from its five LED indicators. These indicators are located on the dialer. Each indicator is described in the following table: Indicator LED Color Activates when...

  • Page 557: Programming The Mrdl

    MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual 4.0 Programming the MRDL 4.1 Accessing the Dialer Settings 1. At the initial programming screen (Figure 2), do the following: a. Check the Enforce Group Associations Checking box. b. Click on the Alarm List Mode list box and select the Local option.

  • Page 558: Dialer Settings

    MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual In the IDs dialog (Figure 4), check the MR-2806-MR check box and click on the Dialer Settings button. Figure 4: Dialer Settings Button 4.2 Dialer Settings The Dialer Settings dialog allows for the programming of various communications options.
  • Page 559 MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual • Zone Data: Display the Zone Data screen. • Maintenance/Common: Display the Dialer Maintenance and Common Reporting Codes screen. Dialer Configuration 1 The Dialer Configuration 1 dialog contains the First Communicator Options, Second Communicator Options and International Options. The Communications option determines if the dialer will communicate to the central station.
  • Page 560 MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual the panel will send the account number and reporting code followed by the [#] key (Hex [C]). There is no ringback when using Pager format. The panel has no way of confirming if the paging attempt was successful. Do not use hexadecimal C in a reporting code when using pager format. In most cases the digit C will be interpreted as a [*], which will terminate the page before it has finished.
  • Page 561 MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual The TLM Trouble Delay controls number telephone line monitoring checks required before a telephone line trouble is generated. dialer checks telephone connection 10-second intervals. Maximum Dialing Attempts to Each Phone Number number of attempts that the dialer will make to each...
  • Page 562 MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual The Reporting Codes are used when SIA or Contact ID is set to Programmed, or when using BPS formats. There are six reporting codes for each group. They are: • Zone Alarm Reporting Code • Zone Alarm Restoral Reporting Code •...

  • Page 563: Appendix A: Table Of Reporting Codes

    MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual 5.0 Appendix A: Table of Reporting Codes The following tables contain automatic Contact ID and SIA format reporting codes. For more information on reporting formats. 5.1 Contact ID The first digit (in parentheses) will automatically be sent by the control. The second two digits are programmed to indicate specific information about the signal.
  • Page 564 MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual Table 1: Automatic Contact ID/SIA Reporting Codes Contact Reporting Dialer ID Auto Sia Auto Code Sent When… Code Direction* Rep Codes Codes Zone Supv./ zone goes into supervisory/ restore (2) AA See Table 3 Rest. Zone Alarms/...
  • Page 565 MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual Table 2: Contact ID Zone Alarm/Restoral Event Codes Program any of these codes for zone alarms/restorals when using the standard (i.e. not automatic) Contact ID reporting format: Medical Alarms (1)18 Near Alarm 24 Hour Non-Fire (1)A1 Emergency...

  • Page 566: Appendix B: Table Of Compatible Receivers

    MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual 6.0 Appendix B: Table of Compatible Receivers Osbourne Sur-Gard Bell Format/ Sur-Gard Sur-Gard Hoffman Silent Ademco Radionics MLR200 Mobility Receiver Quick Knight 6500 Pager Alert II 10 bps (1400Hz handshake) 10 bps (2300Hz handshake) 20 bps (1400Hz...

  • Page 567: Warranty And Warning Information

    MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual 7.0 Warranty and Warning Information 7.1 Warning Please Read Carefully Note to Installers This warning contains vital information. As the only individual in contact with system users, it is your responsibility to bring each item in this warning to the attention of the users of this system. Failure to properly inform system end-users of the circumstances in which the system might fail may result in over-reliance upon the system.
  • Page 568 7.2 Limited Warranty Secutron Inc. warrants the original purchaser that for a period of five years from the date of purchase, the product shall be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. During the warranty period, Secutron Inc. shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials.
  • Page 569 MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual Secutron Inc. will at its option repair or replace out-of-warranty products which are returned to its factory according to the following conditions. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number. Secutron Inc. will not accept any shipment whatsoever for which prior authorization has not been obtained.
  • Page 570 MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual 8.0 FCC Compliance Statement CAUTION: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void your authority to use this equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
  • Page 571 MR-2100/2200 Installation Manual ADDITIONAL TELEPHONE COMPANY INFORMATION The security control panel must be properly connected to the telephone line with a USOC RJ-31X telephone jack. The FCC prohibits customer-provided terminal equipment be connected to party lines or to be used in conjunction with coin telephone service. Interconnect rules may vary from state to state.
  • Page 572 No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron. Canada Secutron Inc. 60 Industrial Parkway...
  • Page 573 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Limited Warranty Secutron warrants that for a period of five years from the date of purchase, the product MR-2801 Reverse Polarity/ shall be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use and that in ful- Municipal Box Module fillment of any breach of such warranty, Secutron shall, at its option, repair or replace the defective equipment upon return of the equipment to its repair depot.
  • Page 574 Table 1 JUMPER PROGRAMMING MR-2801 Option Jumper Settings Function J1 - Off Module Municipal Box Output enabled - Polarity Reversal disabled J1 - On Configuration Polarity Reversal enabled - Municipal Box output disabled Reverse Polarity/ Off During an Alarm event the Alarm output reverses polarity Municipal Box During a Supervisory event the Supervisory output reverses polarity During a Trouble event the Trouble output reverses polarity...
  • Page 575 MR-2614 Annunciator Installation Instructions 1.0 General Information The basic MR-2614 Annunciator has 8 zones consisting of a red alarm LED and a yellow trouble LED. There are four common LEDs for alarm (red), supervisory (yellow), trouble (yellow) and power (green). There are four switch inputs that are used as follows: 1) Reset, 2) Signal Silence (this function is not UL listed), 3) Acknowledge, 4) Local Lamp Test.
  • Page 576 1.1 Technical Specifications MR-2614 Voltage 24VDC Normal Current 20 mA Max. Current MR-2614 115 mA MR-2614EH 155 mA Switch SPST N/O momentary contact MR-2622 Voltage 24 VDC Normal Current 5 mA Maximum Current 125 mA Data Communications Maximum Distance 900m (3000 ft), 22 AWG Communication Wire 18 to 22 AWG Twisted Pair Power Power Wire...
  • Page 577 2.0 Installation 2.1 Mounting These mounting instruction are specifically for the MR-2614S, MR- 2614EHS and the MR-2614EHS+MR-2622S annunciator packages. 1. Choose a suitable place for mounting, considering all applicable codes and standards. 2. Remove the screws from the top and bottom of the annunciator. 3.
  • Page 578 MR2900 Control Unit The MR-2900 control unit is connected to the MR-2614 Annun- ciator by 4 wires, 2 for power and 2 for com- munications. The wir- polarity sensitive. Wiring is as shown in Figure 2. The MR-2900 panel requires that the Figure 2: MR-2900 Wiring MR-2109-3 communi- cations...
  • Page 579 Multiple MR-2614EH Up to 8 MR-2614EH annunciators can be connected a FACP. If more than one MR-2614EH is used, the wiring is done as a daisy chain starting from the panel and going to each MR-2614EH in turn (see Figure 5). The 3.9 k resistor across the pigtail terminations must be removed from all MR-2614EH annunciators except the last one.
  • Page 580 MR-2915 The MR-2915 LED Driver has a 50 pin connector for connection to the LEDs. The LEDs are wired to a 50 pin socket which the MR-2915 plugs into. The pin-outs are shown in Figure 7. Note: All LEDs wired to the same MR-2915 share a common positive.
  • Page 581 3.0 Programming The MR-2614EH annunciator is programmed through the service terminal connection at the bottom of the board, marked P4. This connection is a special 4 pin connector. The MR-2614EH uses serial communication of 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity and 1 stop bit. Normally, programming is required only when there is more than one MR-2614EH being used.
  • Page 582 LT-2029 Rev. B Canada 25 Interchange Way 60 Industrial Parkway Vaughan, ON, L4K 5W3 Cheektowaga, NY, 14227 Tel: (905) 695-3545 Tel: 1-888-SECUTRON Fax: (905) 660-4113 Fax: 888-660-4113 www.secutron.com...
  • Page 583 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FCC Compliance Statement INSTUCTIONS D’INSTALLATION This equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not INSTRUCCIONES DE INSTALACIÓN installed and used properly, in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, may cause interference to radio and television reception. It has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B device in accordance with the specifications in Subpart “B”...
  • Page 584 M R - 2 3 0 0 S E R I E S LED Fire Alarm Control Panel NSTALLATION & PERATION MANUAL Revision A Document #: LT-905SEC WARNING: This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer.
  • Page 585 Secutron Inc. Secutron Inc. 25 Interchange Way Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3 Please call us at 1-888-SECUTRON (1-888-732-8876) if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
  • Page 586 Cautions and Warnings READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depends upon proper installation. DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED. Upon unpacking your equipment, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage.
  • Page 587 MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Contents Industry Canada and FCC Notice ................... 1 Introduction ..........................2 Overall Features ........................2 Conventions ..........................3 Circuits ..........................3 Zone............................3 Display Points ........................3 Wiring Styles ......................... 3 System Components ....................... 4 Main Fire Control Panel ......................
  • Page 588 Contents Indicators, Controls and Operations ..................28 Common Indicators ......................29 Alarm Circuit Indicators ......................31 Supervisory Circuit Indicators ....................31 Monitor Circuit Indicators ..................... 31 Trouble-only Circuit Indicators ..................... 32 Signal Circuit Indicators ....................... 32 Common Controls ........................ 32 Circuit (zone) disconnect buttons..................
  • Page 589 MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual List of Figures and Tables Figures Figure 1: Box dimensions, surface mount ................10 Figure 2: Box dimensions, semi-flush mounting and trim ring ..........11 Figure 3: Installation of Adder Modules ................12 Figure 4: Main Fire Alarm Board cable connector and jumper settings .......13 Figure 5: MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module ..........14 Figure 6: MR-2300-NC4\NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module ......15 Figure 7: MR-2312-R12 twelve relay adder module ............15...
  • Page 590 List of Figures and Tables...
  • Page 591 Contact your telephone company if you have any questions about your phone line. In the event repairs are ever needed on the Communicator, they should be performed by Secutron Inc. or an authorized representative of Secutron Inc.. For information contact...
  • Page 592 Introduction Introduction Secutron's MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Control Panel is a Digital Signal Processor (DSP)-based fire panel. The MR- 2300 provides a maximum of 12 supervised Class B or A (Style B or D) Initiating circuits, and maximum four supervised Class B or A (Style Y or Z) indicating circuits. All circuits are supervised for opens and ground faults, and indicating circuits are supervised for shorts.
  • Page 593 MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Conventions Circuits Refers to an actual electrical interface for Initiating (Detection) and Indicating (Signal) or Relays. Zone Is a logical concept for a Fire Alarm Protected Area, and will consist of at least one Circuit. Often the terms Zone and Circuit are used interchangeably, but in this Manual the term Circuit is used.
  • Page 594 System Components System Components Main Fire Control Panel Model Description 12 Zone Fire Alarm Control Panel with LED display (white door, black box). 12 Class B (Style B) Initiating circuits, and four Power Limited Class B (Style Y) Indicating circuits (up to 1.70 amperes each, 5 amperes total).
  • Page 595 MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual 8 Zone Fire Alarm Control Panel with LED display (white door, black box). 8 Class B (Style B) Initiating circuits, and four Power Limited Class B (Style Y) Indicating circuits (up to1.70 amperes each, 5 amperes total). Two six zone MR-2300-A Input Class A converter adder modules may be used for Class A (Style D) wiring of Initiating circuits.
  • Page 596 System Components Relay Module: 12 Relays Model Description MR-2312-R12 Twelve-relay adder module RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY 3 RELAY 4 RELAY 5 RELAY 6 RELAY 7 RELAY 8 RELAY 9 RELAY 10 RELAY 11 RELAY 12 NO/NC NO/NC NO/NC NO/NC NO/NC NO/NC NO/NC...
  • Page 597 MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Remote Annunciator Model Description Remote Annunciator MR-2300-LCDW module, LCD display, white painted box SYSTEM NORMAL 18:01 MON 2003-04-05 A.C. ON ALARM SUPV TRBL CPU FAIL SYSTEM RESET SIGNAL ENTER SILENCE FIRE MENU DRILL Remote Annunciator BUZZER...
  • Page 598 System Components Input Class A converter: Six Circuits Model Description Input Class A converter Module (six MR-2300-A circuits). This module has built in Active End-of-Line resistors. Output Class A converter: four circuits Model Description Output Class A converter module (four MR-2300-NC4 circuits) Output Class A converter: two circuits...
  • Page 599 MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual MR-2312-AT Remote Annunciator Model Description A.C. COMMON SIGNAL TROUBLE SILEBCE MR-2312-ATW/ BUZZER SIGNAL SILENCE SILENCE 16 Zone remote annunciator MR-2312-ATR SWITCH ENABLE LAMP SYSTEM TEST RESET FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR Additional Fire Alarm System Accessories Model: MR-2306-ATW/MR-2306-ATW/ Eight Zone Remote Annunciator (ULC and ULI Approved) Model: MR-2605-T Remote Trouble Indicator...
  • Page 600 Mechanical Installation Mechanical Installation Installing the Enclosure Install the MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Panel enclosure as shown below for the twelve and eight-zone models. Mount enclosure surface mount using the four mounting holes, as shown and the screws provided. Figure 1: Box dimensions, surface mount 11"...

  • Page 601: Figure 2: Box Dimensions, Semi-Flush Mounting And Trim Ring

    MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Figure 2: Box dimensions, semi-flush mounting and trim ring The figure below shows a cross-section of the semi-flush mounted backbox and the trim ring. Make sure to allow a minimum depth of 1” above the wall surface for proper door opening. TRIM RING WALL WOOD OR...
  • Page 602 Mechanical Installation Installing the Adder Modules MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm panels come pre-assembled with all components and boards except for Adder Modules. Module installation locations are shown below. Refer to Figure 4 on the next page for Jumper or DIP Switch settings and see Wiring Tables and Information for wiring specifications.
  • Page 603 MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules Main Fire Alarm Board Figure 4: Main Fire Alarm Board cable connector and jumper settings For PC programming use SUIMA JW6-Open all the time interface module not UL-864 or ULC-S527 listed.
  • Page 604 Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules Table 1: Connectors and Jumpers on the Main Fire Alarm Board Cable from P1 of the MR-2300-PR Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module connects here. Otherwise not used. Cable from connector P1 of the MR-2312-R12 or MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module connects here.

  • Page 605: Mr-2300-Nc4\Nc2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module

    MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual MR-2300-NC4\NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module Figure 6: MR-2300-NC4\NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module mounting hole for #6-32 screws mounting hole for #6-32 screws MR-2300-NC4 SOCA-204 MR-2300-NC2 SOCA-202 mounting hole for #6-32 screws mounting hole for #6-32 screws Indicating circuits must be wired from the MR-2300-NC4/NC2 to the main Fire Alarm board.

  • Page 606: Figure 8: Mr-2312-R12/2306-R6 Relay Programming

    Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules Figure 8: MR-2312-R12/2306-R6 Relay programming ZONE JUMPER installed: turns ON relay when the zone (1) is active LOGICAL OR WITH ADJACENT ZONE removed: does not turn ON the relay when jumper installed: this relay 1 works in zone (1) is active conjunction with relay 2...
  • Page 607 MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (Model MR-2300-PR) Figure 10: Polarity reversal and city tie module Mounting hole for #6-32 screws Mounting hole for #6-32 screws The following hardware configuration must be performed before installing the MR-2300-PR. Table 2: MR-2300-PR jumper settings Cable connects to P5 on the Main Fire Alarm Board Cut this jumper for Trouble transmission.
  • Page 608 Field wiring Field wiring Main Fire Alarm Board Field Wiring Wire devices to the terminals as shown in the figures that follow. Refer to the Wiring Tables for wire gauges and to Appendix A for specifications. CAUTION: Do not exceed power supply ratings. Initiating Circuit Wiring Wiring diagrams for the initiating circuits are shown below.

  • Page 609: Figure 12: Initiating Circuit– Class A Or Style D Wiring

    MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Figure 12: Initiating circuit– Class A or Style D wiring MR-2300-A SICA-206 CLASS A CONVERTER MODULE STYLE D WIRING FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD INITIATING CIRCUIT - 1 ALARM ZONE INITIATING CIRCUIT #1 INITIATING STYLE D CIRCUIT #2...

  • Page 610: Figure 14: Indicating Circuit –Class A Or Style Z Wiring

    Field wiring Figure 14: Indicating circuit –Class A or Style Z wiring MR-2300-NC4 SOCA-204 CLASS A STYLE Y CONVERTER MODULE WIRING FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD INDICATING CIRCUIT 1 INDICATING CIRCUIT #1 INDICATING CIRCUIT #2 STYLE Y WIRING 2 MORE INDICATING INDICATING CIRCUITS NOT SHOWN CIRCUIT 2...
  • Page 611 MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Dialer Wiring If you have Fire Alarm Panel Models MR-2312-LDW, MR-2312-LDR, and MR-2308-LDW there is a dialer on board and terminals marked Line 1 and Line 2 must be wired as shown in Figure 16 below. Figure 16: Dialer wiring FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD RJ31X...
  • Page 612 Field wiring Figure 18: Relay per zone (MR-2306-R6) Terminal connection...
  • Page 613 MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (MR-2300-PR) Wiring Wire MR-2300-PR Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (if used) as shown in Figure 19, below. See Appendix A for module specifications. Power Limited cable type FPL, FPLR or FPLP must be used. For USA installation, the installer must use Atlantic Scientific (Tel: 407-725-8000), Model #24544 Protective Device, or similar UL-Listed QVRG secondary protector, as shown.
  • Page 614 Field wiring Power supply connection The power supply is part of the Main Chassis. The ratings are: Type Rating Electrical Input rating 120VAC, 60Hz, 3A\ 240 VAC 50Hz 1.5A fuse Power supply total current 6A maximum Battery fuse on Main 10A, slow blow micro fuse module Wire the power supply as shown in Figure 20 using the proper wire gauge.
  • Page 615 MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Wiring Tables and Information Table 3: Initiating Circuit Wiring Wire gauge Maximum wiring run to last device Feet Meters 2990 4760 1450 7560 2300 12000 3600 19000 5800 30400 9200 Notes: • For Class A the maximum wiring run to the last device is divided by two. •...
  • Page 616 Field wiring Auxiliary Power (unregulated) This unregulated supply is not supervised. This supply is rated at 24VDC/1.7A max. If there is a short on this circuit, the auxiliary power does not recover automatically when the short is removed. The main power must be disconnected, then reconnected and the panel reset to re-establish the auxiliary power supply.

  • Page 617: Troubleshooting

    MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual System Checkout Before turning the power “ON” To prevent sparking, do not connect the batteries. Connect the batteries after powering the system from the main AC supply. 1. Check that all modules are installed in the proper location with the proper connections. 2.

  • Page 618: Indicators, Controls And Operations

    Indicators, Controls and Operations Indicators, Controls and Operations Refer to Figure 21 below for LED Indicator and Control Button locations. Figure 21: LED indicators and control buttons WALK A.C. TE S T RE MO TE CO MMO N TRO UBLE ALARM CO MMO N CP U FAIL...

  • Page 619: Common Indicators

    MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual The Main Display Panel on the Main Fire Alarm Control Board consists of: • 18 common LED Indicators (top half of display) • Eight Common Buttons (top half of display) • up to 12 Initiating Circuit Alarm LEDs and 12 Initiating Circuit Trouble LED Indicators •...
  • Page 620 Indicators, Controls and Operations Fire Drill LED The amber Fire Drill Indicator illuminates steadily while Fire Drill is active. Acknowledge LED If the Panel is configured as a two-stage system, the Acknowledge Indicator flashes amber at the Fast Flash Rate while the Auto General Alarm Timer is timing out.

  • Page 621: Alarm Circuit Indicators

    MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Alarm Circuit Indicators This operation applies to Initiating Circuits configured as Verified Alarm, Non-Verified Alarm, Water flow Alarm, Sprinkler Alarm, or General Alarm Circuits. The following table summarizes the indications at different events. Event Circuit Trouble LED Configuration...

  • Page 622: Trouble-Only Circuit Indicators

    Indicators, Controls and Operations Trouble-only Circuit Indicators This operation applies to initiating circuits configured as Trouble-Only Circuits. The following table summarizes the indications in response to different events. Event Circuit Trouble LED Configuration Flashes at the trouble rate Open circuit or (Style D)/(Class A) trouble (amber) Flashes at the trouble rate Disconnected...

  • Page 623: Circuit (Zone) Disconnect Buttons

    MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Fire Drill Button The Fire Drill button activates all Non-Disconnected Indicating Circuits, but does not transmit any Alarms via the City Tie, Common Alarm Relay or Auxiliary Alarm Relay. Fire Drill activates the signals in the evacuation code programmed.

  • Page 624: Common Relays

    Indicators, Controls and Operations When an Initiating Circuit Disconnect pushbutton is returned to the normal state (by pressing it again in order to un- bypass the circuit), the panel checks the state of the circuit. If the circuit is active, the Status Indicator flashes for 10 seconds at the Fast Rate without processing the input.
  • Page 625 MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Water Flow Alarm (Water flow Sensors) Water Flow Alarms are identical to normal Non-Verified Alarms except that any indicating circuits programmed to these circuits (all are by default) are Non-Silenceable. Also, if Water Flow Retard Operation is enabled, these circuits are sampled every one second.

  • Page 626: Evacuation Codes

    Indicators, Controls and Operations condition: the configured Evacuation Code (default is Temporal Code) during Single-Stage Alarm or Two-Stage General Alarm, or the Alert Code during the alert (first) stage of a two-stage alarm. Silenceable Strobe Silenceable strobes will be silenced when the “signal silence” key is pressed. For synchronous strobes see supported protocol/devices section.

  • Page 627: Single Stage Operation

    MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Single Stage Operation In a single stage system all alarm inputs are treated in a similar manner. Alarm inputs include any of the following: Non-Verified Alarm, Verified Alarm, Sprinkler Alarm, Water flow Alarm, and General Alarm Circuits. If any of these alarm inputs occur when the panel is not already in alarm, the following occurs: •...
  • Page 628 Indicators, Controls and Operations • If the panel is not already in General Alarm and if the Acknowledge Indicator is ON steady, indicating that the Auto General Alarm Timer has been acknowledged, the timer is restarted and the Acknowledge LED is extinguished.

  • Page 629: Supported Protocols/Devices

    Supported Protocols/Devices Synchronous Strobes The synchronous strobe models that are supported by the MR2300 panel Secutron models MRL-ST and MRA-HS. A separate compatibility list is available for different supported models. Strobes can be configures as normal (e.g. not synchronized or any of the above; see configuration section). Any selection made is system-wide (e.g.
  • Page 630 Supported Protocols/Devices Open circuit trouble If the loop is broken the panel shows open loop trouble. The panel can still communicate with the devices depending upon where the open occurs. Z o n e - 1 O p e n T r b . 1 / 1 Communication Trouble If there is a fault in the line or the line is too noisy, the panel cannot communicate with the devices.

  • Page 631: Configuration And Cfg-300 Lcd Service Tool

    MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool There are three methods of configuring the MR-2300 LED Series Fire Alarm Panels: 1. Using the CFG-300 LCD Tool (see further documentation packaged with CFG-300 for configuration informa- tion).

  • Page 632: Entering The Passcode

    Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool Entering the Passcode The programming section is passcode protected. The following screen shows the message that is displayed to enter the passcode. The maximum allowable passcode is ten digits long, and permits numerical values only. Press the “ENTER”...

  • Page 633: Config (Command-Menu)

    MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual 1. MR-2300 CONFIG (Command-Menu) The following is a detailed description of the MR-2300 configuration menu. Command Menu/MR-2300 Config-->Features - Feature Config - 1 Man. Sig. Sil. 2 Fire Drill 3 Opt. Ckt. Corr 4 Wtr/Sprk.
  • Page 634 Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 1. Press MENU to enter the command menu. 2. Select a Command Menu option by pressing ENTER. The corresponding submenu will display. 3. Use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the submenu. 4.
  • Page 635 MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/ Use this function to inhibit the [X] DISABLE->Default Features/ “SIGNAL SILENCE” switch for a [ ] 10 SEC desired length of time. This time 6.Signal-Silence Inhibit timer [ ] 20 SEC period should expire before the signals may be silenced.
  • Page 636 The [X] NORMAL ->Default 14.Strobe Type selection is system-wide and [ ] SECUTRON applies to all indicating circuits S t r o b e T y p e [ ] FARADY configured as strobes. For [ X ] N O R M A L “NORMAL”...
  • Page 637 MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/Features/ 18. Auto General Alarm Timer [X] DISABLE->Default [ ] 5 Min This function is used for two- [ ] 10 Min stage systems only. This A u t o G e n - A l a r m T i m e r function sets the time period for [ ] 15 Min [ X ] D I S A B L E...
  • Page 638 Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool Command Menu-->MR-2300 Config Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Inp Zone I n i t i a t i n g Z o n e 1 Z o n e - 1 2 Z o n e - 2 1 2 Z o n e 1 2...
  • Page 639 MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Command Menu-->MR-2300 Config Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Opt Zone I n d i c a t i n g Z o n e 1 N A C - 1 2 N A C - 2 3 N A C - 3...
  • Page 640 Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool Command Menu-->MR-2300 Config Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Inp Zone Msg I n i t i a t i n g Z o n e 1 Z o n e - 1 2 Z o n e - 2 1 2 Z o n e 1 2...
  • Page 641 MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Command Menu-->MR-2300 Config Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Opt Zone Label I n d i c a t i n g Z o n e 1 N A C - 1 2 N A C - 2 3 N A C - 3...

  • Page 642: Config Info

    Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool 2. Config Info (Command-Menu Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Configuration type will show how the panel was configured. Configuration type: “Factory default”...

  • Page 643: Set Time (Command-Menu)

    MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual 3. Set Time (Command-Menu) Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. 1 Daylight Save 2 Time Clock 3 Compensation Command Menu/Set time Date 1.

  • Page 644: Change Password (Command-Menu)

    Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool 4. Change password (Command-Menu) Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Enter new passcode Re-enter passcode If the passcode does not match, the Use this function to change the pass-code.

  • Page 645: Clear Event Log (Command-Menu)

    MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual 6. Clear Event Log (Command-Menu) Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. -Select Log- 1 Alarm Log 2 General Log 3 All Logs Select the type of log to clear.

  • Page 646: Walk Test (Command-Menu)

    Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool 7. Walk Test (Command-Menu) Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Walk-Test allows an installer to verify the initiating circuit wiring in a system. When walk test is selected, the following screen confirms the operation: P e r f o r m t h e w a l k t e s t ? Y...

  • Page 647: I3 Loop Test (Command-Menu)

    MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual 8. i Loop Test (Command-Menu) Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. The i maintenance test is designed to test the devices on i zone.

  • Page 648: Dialer Config (Command-Menu)

    Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool 9. Dialer Config (Command-Menu) Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. The following illustration shows the dialer configuration menu. This menu will show up only if there is a built-in dialer on the main board.
  • Page 649 MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info Use this function to set the telephone number of the 2.Account#1 Telephone Number monitoring station. The maximum # of digits allowed is A c c o u n t # 1 T e l n u m : 19 including “,”...
  • Page 650 Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool Command Menu-->Dialer Config Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Telephone Line - T e l e p h o n e L i n e - 1 L i n e 1 D i a l t y p e 2 L i n e 2 D i a l t y p e 3 L i n e 1 D i a l t o n e...
  • Page 651 MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Command Menu-->Dialer-Config Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Report Options - Report Options - 1 Alarm Prio. 2 Trouble Prio.
  • Page 652 Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report Options 5.Fire Panel type [X] MR-2300 Panel Do not change this function; keep it as default. ->Default For factory use only Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report Options Use this function to select the 6.Dialer operation mode functionality of the dialer.
  • Page 653 MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Time Use this function to set the test Parameter report date for the cell phone setup. If the date is set to 0, 2.Cellular report date this means there is no test reporting for cell phone or the Cellular Report Date phone line is a regular line.

  • Page 654: Test Dialer (Command-Menu)

    Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool Command Menu-->Dialer-Config Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 44 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Dialer Enable/Disable D i a l e r E n a / D i s The dialer is enabled by default.
  • Page 655 MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Dialer Test Messages The following messages will display during the test processes of Lines #1 and #2. The messages that will appear depend on the status of the dialer and the test results that are found. The dialer is checking the line for voltage.

  • Page 656: Exit (Command-Menu)

    Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool 11. Exit (Command-Menu) Pressing, “ENTER” after selecting “Exit“ from the menu will return the panel to normal LCD operation. CFG-300 LCD Service tool operation If an LCD service tool is connected to the panel, you will only be able to view the latest message–you cannot scroll through them.
  • Page 657 MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual AC Power Fail The AC power fail trouble is generated when the power drops below the UL specified value. The trouble is restored when the power returns to the normal value. T ro u b le c o d e T ro u b le In fo T ro u b le T yp e A C P o w e r F a i l...
  • Page 658 Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool Remote Annunciator Troubles related to the annunciator can have two possibilities: either the main panel and annunciator failed to communicate with each other, or an un-configured remote annunciator is responding to the main panel. In both the cases, the following trouble message is displayed: T ro u b le in fo T ro u b le T yp e...
  • Page 659 MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Supervised Aux-supply The supervised aux-supply is supervised for shorts. When a short is detected on supervised aux-supply the power is cut off and a trouble message is generated. Press the system “RESET” key to restore the power the system. If the short is removed, the panel will return to normal;...

  • Page 660: Appendix A: Compatible Receivers

    Appendix A: Compatible Receivers Appendix A: Compatible Receivers The dialers that are built into select models of the MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Control Panels are compatible with the following Digital Alarm Communicator Receivers (DACR): DACR Receiver Model Protocols SurGard MLR2 Multi-Line Receiver (ULC, ULI approved) SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID SurGard SLR Single-Line Receiver (ULC, ULI approved) SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID...

  • Page 661: Appendix B: Reporting

    MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B: Reporting Ademco Contact-ID MR-2300 Event Codes Event Description Event Family Qualifier Code Group # Contact # Phone Line #1 trouble detected Trouble New event 1 351 Phone Line #2 trouble detected Trouble New event 1 352...

  • Page 662: Security Industries Association Sia-Dcs

    Appendix B: Reporting Security Industries Association SIA-DCS SIA protocol does not define indicating zone troubles, but lists it as Untyped Zone Trouble/Restore. MR-2300 Event Codes SIA Event Event Description Event Family Qualifier Parameter Code Phone Line #1 trouble detected Trouble New event Phone Line #2 trouble detected Trouble...

  • Page 663: Appendix C: Specifications

    MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Appendix C: Specifications MR-2300 Fire Alarm Control Panel (LED) MR-2312-R12/2306-R6 Relay adder module Digital Signal Processor (DSP) based design. Fully configurable Must be connected to a listed power-limited source of supply using front panel LCD display with Password Access. Contact rating NO / NC / 28VDC per contact / 1A resistive load Electrical Ratings AC line voltage...

  • Page 664: Appendix D: Power Supply And Battery Calculations (Selection Guide)

    STANDBY * Assume three Initiating Circuits are in alarm. ' Use 0.084 for five minutes of alarm as a multiplier figure. Secutron 1400 Using the 2-wire photoelectric smoke detector. See Appendix A for other compatible smoke detectors. Total Current Requirement: ALARM (B)______ Amps.

  • Page 665: Warranty

    MR-2300 Series LED Version Installation and Operation Manual Warranty & Warning Information Warning Please Read Carefully Note to End Users: This equipment is subject to terms and conditions of sale as follows: Note to Installers This warning contains vital information. As the only individual in contact with system users, it is your responsibility to bring each item in this warning to the attention of the users of this system.
  • Page 666 Secutron shall not be liable for any delays, breakdowns, interruptions, loss, destruction, alteration or other problems in the use of a product arising our of, or caused by, the software.
  • Page 667 During the warranty period, Secutron Inc. shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials. Any replacement and/or repaired parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer.
  • Page 668 Warranty & Warning Information Out of Warranty Repairs Secutron Inc. will at its option repair or replace out-of-warranty products which are returned to its factory according to the following conditions. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number.
  • Page 669 No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron. Canada U.S.A 25 Interchange Way...
  • Page 670 M R - 2 3 0 0 S E R I E S LCD Fire Alarm Control Panel NSTALLATION & PERATION MANUAL Document #: LT-906SEC Rev.1 WARNING: This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer.
  • Page 671 Secutron Inc. Secutron Inc. 25 Interchange Way Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3 Please call us at 1-888-SECUTRON (1-888-732-8876) if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
  • Page 672 Cautions and Warnings READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depends upon proper installation. DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED. Upon unpacking your equipment, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage.
  • Page 673 MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Contents Industry Canada and FCC Notice ................... 1 Introduction ..........................2 Overall Features ........................2 Conventions ..........................3 Circuits ..........................3 Zone............................3 Events ........................... 3 Wiring Styles ......................... 3 System Components, Sub-Assemblies & Accessories............4 Main Fire Control Panel ......................
  • Page 674 Contents Supported Protocols/Devices ....................34 Synchronous Strobes......................34 System Sensor’s i3 Devices....................34 Configuration .......................... 36 Entering the Passcode ......................36 Command Menu........................37 1. MR-2300 CONFIG (Command-Menu) ................38 2. Config Info (Command-Menu)..................46 3. Set Time (Command-Menu)..................... 47 4.
  • Page 675 MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual List of Figures & Tables Figure 1: Box dimensions, surface mount ................8 Figure 2: MR-2312-DDR Box dimensions, semi-flush mounting with trim ring ...... 9 Figure 2A: MR-2306-DDR6DR Box dimensions, mounting and trim ring ......10 Figure 3: Installation of Adder Modules for MR-2312 LCD Panels ........
  • Page 676 List of Figures & Tables...

  • Page 677: Industry Canada And Fcc Notice

    Communicator, they should be performed by Secutron Fire Alarm System’s or an authorized representative of Secutron Fire Alarm System. For information contact Secutron Fire Alarm System at the address and phone numbers shown on the back page of this document.

  • Page 678: Introduction

    Introduction Secutron's MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Control Panel is a Digital Signal Processor (DSP) based fire panel. The MR- 2300 provides a maximum of 12 supervised Class B or A (Style B or D) Initiating circuits, and maximum of four supervised Class B or A (Style Y or Z) indicating circuits.

  • Page 679: Conventions

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Conventions Circuits Refers to an actual electrical interface for Initiating (Detection) and Indicating (Signal) or Relays. Zone Is a logical concept for a Fire Alarm Protected Area, and will consist of at least one Circuit. Often the terms Zone and Circuit are used interchangeably, but in this Manual the term Circuit is used.

  • Page 680: System Components, Sub-Assemblies & Accessories

    System Components, Sub-Assemblies & Accessories System Components, Sub-Assemblies & Accessories Main Fire Control Panel Model Description Twelve-Zone Fire Alarm Control Panel with LCD display and dialer (red door, black box). 12 Class B (Style B) Initiating circuits, and four Power Limited Class B (Style Y) Indicating circuits (up to 1.70 amperes each, 5 amperes total).

  • Page 681: Relay Module: 12 Relays

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Relay Module: 12 Relays Model Description MR-2312-R12 Twelve-relay adder module RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY 3 RELAY 4 RELAY 5 RELAY 6 RELAY 7 RELAY 8 RELAY 9 RELAY 10 RELAY 11 RELAY 12 NO/NC NO/NC...

  • Page 682: Remote Annunciator

    System Components, Sub-Assemblies & Accessories Remote Annunciator Model Description 7.7" SYSTEM NORMAL 18:01 MON 2003-04-05 A.C. ON ALARM SUPV TRBL CPU FAIL SYSTEM RESET 7.2" SIGNAL ENTER SILENCE Remote Annunciator Module, MR-2300-LCDR FIRE MENU DRILL LCD display, red enclosure BUZZER CANCEL SILENCE LAMP...

  • Page 683: Output Class A Converter: Four Circuits

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Output Class A converter: four circuits Model Description Output Class A converter module (four MR-2300-NC4 circuits) Output Class A converter: two circuits Model Description Output Class A converter module (two MR-2300-NC2 circuits) Active end-of-line The MR-2300-X are power-saving End-of-Line resistors that eliminate the need for an additional battery cabinet or larger batteries in order to meet the 60 hour standby requirement.

  • Page 684: Mechanical Installation

    Mechanical Installation Mechanical Installation Installing the Enclosure Install the MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Panel enclosure as shown below for the twelve zone models. Mount enclosure surface mount using the four mounting holes, as shown and the screws provided. The backbox may be semi-flush mounted using the trim ring model MR-2312-FT (BLACK), see Figure 2.

  • Page 685: Figure 2: Mr-2312-Ddr Box Dimensions, Semi-Flush Mounting With Trim Ring

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Figure 2: MR-2312-DDR Box dimensions, semi-flush mounting with trim ring 11" 1.5" PLACE MR-2312-FT TRIM RING OVER BACKBOX 17" 20.5" 26" Adhere trim ring to 28.5" wall surface around MR-2306 backbox. 5.4" 3.5"...

  • Page 686: Figure 2A: Mr-2306-Ddr6Dr Box Dimensions, Mounting And Trim Ring

    Mechanical Installation Figure 2A: MR-2306-DDR6DR Box dimensions, mounting and trim ring 11" 1.5" PLACE MR-2306-FT TRIM RING OVER BACKBOX 17" 4 Mounting Holes for Surface 14.5" Mounting 20.0" Adhere trim ring to wall surface around 22.5" the MR-2306 backbox. 5.425" 3.5"...

  • Page 687: Installing The Adder Modules

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Installing the Adder Modules MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm panels come pre-assembled with all components and boards except for Adder Modules. Module installation locations are shown below. Refer to Figure 4 for Jumper or DIP Switch settings and see Wiring Tables and Information section for wiring information.

  • Page 688: Figure 4: Installation Of Adder Modules For Mr-2306 Lcd Panels

    Mechanical Installation Figure 4: Installation of Adder Modules for MR-2306 LCD Panels MAIN FIRE PANEL BOARD CLASS-A converter board for detection circuits MR-2300-A LCD configuration (6 circuits ) tool - CFG-300 plugged into the LCD DISPLAY socket shown. SYSTEM NORMAL CLASS-A converter 18:01 MON 2003-04-05 board for indicating...

  • Page 689: Dip Switch And Jumper Selections For Main Board And Adder Modules

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual DIP Switch and Jumper Selections for Main Board and Adder Modules Main Fire Alarm Board Figure 5: Main Fire Alarm Board DIP switch and jumper settings for MR-2312 LCD Panels For PC programming use SUIMA interface module not UL-864 or ULC-S527 listed.
  • Page 690 DIP Switch and Jumper Selections for Main Board and Adder Modules Figure 6: Main Fire Alarm Board DIP switch and jumper settings for MR-2300 LCD Panels For PC programming use SUIMA interface module not UL- 864 or ULC -S527 listed. Telephone line Telephone line Normally open...

  • Page 691: Mr-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module Figure 7: MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module There are no jumpers or cables to set on this module, just wiring from the converter (wires are fixed here) to the Main Fire Alarm Board.

  • Page 692: Mr-2300-Nc4/2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module

    DIP Switch and Jumper Selections for Main Board and Adder Modules MR-2300-NC4/2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module Figure 8: MR-2300-NC4/2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module Indicating circuits must be wired from the MR-2300-NC4/2 to the main Fire Alarm board. For example indicating circuit 1 positive (red wire) and negative (black wire) is wired from the Class A converter module to the positive and negative terminals of Indicating circuit 1 on the Main Fire Alarm board.

  • Page 693: Figure 10: Mr-2312/06-R12/6 Relay Programming

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Programming the relays A typical relay circuit is shown below in Figure 10 with the jumper locations and descriptions. Note: Relay programming should be done before installing the board Figure 10: MR-2312/06-R12/6 Relay programming ZONE JUMPER installed: turns ON relay when the zone (1) is active...

  • Page 694: Polarity Reversal And City Tie Module (Model Mr-2300-Pr)

    DIP Switch and Jumper Selections for Main Board and Adder Modules Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (Model MR-2300-PR) Figure 12: Polarity reversal and city tie module Mounting hole for #6-32 screws Mounting hole for #6-32 screws The following hardware configuration must be performed before installing the MR-2300-PR Table 2: MR-2300-PR jumper settings Cable connects to P5 on the Main Fire Alarm Board Cut this jumper for Trouble transmission.

  • Page 695: Field Wiring

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Field wiring Main Fire Alarm Board Field Wiring Wire devices to the terminals as shown in the figures that follow. Refer to the Wiring Tables for wire gauges and to Appendix A for specifications. CAUTION: Do not exceed power supply ratings.

  • Page 696: Figure 14: Initiating Circuit– Class A Or Style D Wiring

    Field wiring Figure 14: Initiating circuit– Class A or Style D wiring MR-2300-A ICAC-306 CLASS A CONVERTER MODULE STYLE D WIRING FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD INITIATING CIRCUIT - 1 ALARM ZONE INITIATING CIRCUIT #1 INITIATING STYLE D CIRCUIT #2 WIRING INITIATING CIRCUIT - 2 4 MORE INITIATING...

  • Page 697: Figure 16: Indicating Circuit – Class A Or Style Z Wiring

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Figure 16: Indicating circuit – Class A or Style Z wiring MR-2300-NC4 OCAC-304 CLASS A CONVERTER MODULE STYLE Y WIRING FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD INDICATING CIRCUIT 1 INDICATING CIRCUIT #1 INDICATING CIRCUIT #2 STYLE Y WIRING 2 MORE INDICATING...

  • Page 698: Figure 18: Dialer Wiring

    Field wiring Dialer Wiring If you have Fire Alarm Panel Models MR-2312-DDR or MR-2306-DDR there is a dialer on board and terminals marked Line 1 and Line 2 must be wired as shown in Figure 18 below. The dialer circuitry also allows for remote configuration using a PC.

  • Page 699: Relay Adder Module Wiring

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Relay Adder Module Wiring Wire relays on the relay adder modules MR-2312-R12 and MR-2306-R6 as shown in Figures 19 and 20. Figure 19: Relay per zone (MR-2312-R12) Terminal connection RM-312 12 RELAY ADDER MODULE NORMALLY OPEN RELAY NORMALLY OPEN OR...

  • Page 700: Polarity Reversal And City Tie Module (Mr-2300-Pr) Wiring

    Field wiring Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (MR-2300-PR) Wiring Wire MR-2300-PR Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (if used) as shown in Figure 21, below. See Appendix A for module specifications. Power Limited cable type FPL, FPLR or FPLP must be used. For USA installation, the installer must use Atlantic Scientific (Tel: 407-725-8000), Model #24544 Protective Device, or similar UL-Listed QVRG secondary protector, as shown.

  • Page 701: Wiring Tables And Information

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Figure 22: Power supply connection J W 1 red red BATTE RY SEC. TX black white Connect AC power here: black white wire to L green green wire to G white black black wire to N white Battery...

  • Page 702: Four-Wire Smoke Power (Regulated)

    Field wiring Table 4: Indicating Circuit Wiring Maximum wiring run to last device Total Max. loop signal resistance load in 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG in ohms amperes Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters 0.06 2350 3750 1143...

  • Page 703: System Checkout

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual System Checkout Before turning the power “ON” To prevent sparking, do not connect the batteries. Connect the batteries after powering the system from the main AC supply. 1. Check that all modules are installed in the proper location with the proper connections. 2.

  • Page 704: Indicators, Controls And Operations

    Indicators, Controls and Operations Indicators, Controls and Operations Refer to Figure 23 below which shows the LCD Display, the Keypad and Control Button locations. Figure 23: LCD Display and control buttons S Y S T E M N O R M A L 1 8 : 0 1 M O N 2 0 0 3 - 0 4 - 0 5 A.C.

  • Page 705: Common Indicators

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Common Indicators Buzzer The Buzzer is activated by any of the following events: Fire Alarm: Steady Supervisory Alarm: Fast Flash Trouble: Trouble Flash Rate If the Buzzer is turned ON in response to a Non-Latching Trouble or Supervisory, it will be turned OFF if the condition causing it goes away and there is no other reason for it to be ON.

  • Page 706: Common Relays

    Indicators, Controls and Operations Signal Silence Button Activation of the Signal Silence button when the panel is in alarm deactivates any Silenceable Indicating Circuits. Non-Silenceable Circuits are unaffected. Signals will resound upon any subsequent alarm. Subsequent operation of signal silence resounds all Silenceable signals. This button does not function during any configured Signal Silence Inhibit Timer period (see Configuration section).

  • Page 707: Circuit Types

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Circuit Types Initiating (Detection) Circuit Types Non-Verified Alarm A Non-Verified alarm is a “normal” type of alarm that can have pull stations, smoke detectors, or heat detectors attached to it. Activation of any of these devices will immediately result in an alarm condition in the Fire Alarm Control Panel.

  • Page 708: Evacuation Codes

    Indicators, Controls and Operations either manually or automatically. While sounding, these devices follow the pattern appropriate for the condition: the configured Evacuation Code (default is Temporal Code) during alarm. Non-Silenceable Signal The Non-Silenceable Signal Circuit is used for audible devices such as bells and piezo mini-horns that may not be silenced either manually or automatically.

  • Page 709: Fire Alarm Operation

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Fire Alarm Operation In a basic system set up all alarm inputs are treated in a similar manner. Alarm inputs include any of the following: Non-Verified Alarm, Verified Alarm, Sprinkler Alarm, and Water flow Alarm. If any of these alarm inputs occur when the panel is not already in alarm, the following occurs: •...

  • Page 710: Supported Protocols/Devices

    Supported Protocols/Devices Synchronous Strobes The synchronous strobe models that are supported by the MR-2300 panel include Secutron models MRL-ST and MRA-HS. A separate compatibility list is available for different supported models. Strobes can be configures as normal (e.g. not synchronized or any of the above; see configuration section). Any selection made is system-wide (e.g.
  • Page 711 MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Open circuit trouble If the loop is broken the panel shows open loop trouble. The panel can still communicate with the devices depending upon where the open occurs. Z o n e - 1 O p e n T r b .

  • Page 712: Configuration

    Configuration Configuration There are three methods of configuring the MR-2300 LCD Series Fire Alarm Panels: Direct configuration using the main LCD display and the menu buttons. Using a PC or Lap Top Computer with a UIMA converter module. Using a PC or laptop computer with remote connection (must use fire alarm with built-in UDACT). The following information for configuring an MR-2300 LCD Series Fire Alarm Panel is based on using the front panel main LCD display for configuration.

  • Page 713: Command Menu

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Command Menu The main command menu is pictured below. The first line of the LCD will always show “-Command Menu-“, and the second line scrolls through different selections. Use the “UP” and “DOWN” keys to scroll through the menu, and press the “ENTER”...

  • Page 714: Config (Command-Menu)

    Configuration 1. MR-2300 CONFIG (Command-Menu) The following is a detailed description of the MR-2300 configuration menu. MR-2300 Command Menu/MR-2300 Config-->Features - Feature Config - 1 Man. Sig. Sil. 2 Fire Drill 3 Opt. Ckt. Corr 4 Wtr/Sprk. Retd 5 Aux Dis Corr 6 Sig-Sil Inh Tmr 7 Aux Dis Alm&Sv 8 Auto Sil.
  • Page 715 MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 1. Press MENU to enter the command menu. 2. Select a Command Menu option by pressing ENTER. The corresponding submenu will display. 3. Use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the submenu. 4.
  • Page 716 Configuration Command Menu/MR-2300 Config/ In the default mode this function Features/ will disconnect the Auxiliary [ ] ENABLE Alarm Relay when selected by 5.Aux. disconnect, disconnects [X] DISABLE->Default Command Menu, Item 12 which Aux Alarm relay and all correlated acts like an Aux. disconnect relays switch.
  • Page 717 The [X] NORMAL ->Default 14.Strobe Type selection is system-wide and [ ] SECUTRON applies to all indicating circuits S t r o b e T y p e [ ] FARADY configured as strobes. For “NORMAL”...
  • Page 718 Configuration Command Menu-->MR-2300 Config Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Inp Zone I n i t i a t i n g Z o n e 1 Z o n e - 1 2 Z o n e - 2 1 2 Z o n e 1 2...
  • Page 719 MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Command Menu-->MR-2300 Config Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Opt Zone I n d i c a t i n g Z o n e 1 N A C - 1 2 N A C - 2 3 N A C - 3...
  • Page 720 Configuration Command Menu-->MR-2300 Config Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Inp Zone Label I n i t i a t i n g Z o n e 1 Z o n e - 1 2 Z o n e - 2 1 2 Z o n e 1 2...
  • Page 721 MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Command Menu-->MR-2300 Config Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Opt Zone Label I n d i c a t i n g Z o n e 1 N A C - 1 2 N A C - 2 3 N A C - 3...

  • Page 722: Config Info (Command-Menu)

    Configuration 2. Config Info (Command-Menu) Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Configuration type will show how the panel was configured. Configuration type: “Factory default” means the panel has not been configured, it is as it came from the factory.

  • Page 723: Set Time (Command-Menu)

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual 3. Set Time (Command-Menu) Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. 1 Daylight Save 2 Time Clock 3 Compensation Command Menu/Set Time 1.

  • Page 724: Set Password (Command-Menu)

    Configuration 4. Set Password (Command-Menu) Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Enter new passcode Re-enter passcode If the passcode does not match, the Use this function to change the following message appears and the passcode.

  • Page 725: Clear Event Log (Command-Menu)

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual 6. Clear Event Log (Command-Menu) Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. -Select Log- 1 Alarm Log 2 General Log 3 All Logs Select the type of log to clear.

  • Page 726: Walk Test (Command-Menu)

    Configuration 7. Walk Test (Command-Menu) Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Walk-Test allows an installer to verify the initiating circuit wiring in a system. When walk test is selected, the following screen confirms the operation: P e r f o r m t h e w a l k t e s t ? Y...

  • Page 727: I3 Loop Test (Command-Menu)

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual 8. i Loop Test (Command-Menu) Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. The i maintenance test is designed to test the devices on the i zone.

  • Page 728: Dialer Config (Command-Menu)

    Configuration 9. Dialer Config (Command-Menu) Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. The following illustration shows the dialer configuration menu. Each item in this menu is described below in detail. -Dialer Config - 1 Account Info 2 Telephone line...
  • Page 729 MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info Use this function to set the telephone number of the monitoring station. The 2.Account#1 Telephone Number maximum # of digits allowed is 19 including “,” and numerals. The “,” A c c o u n t # 1 T e l n u m : will be treated as 1 sec delay.
  • Page 730 Configuration Command Menu-->Dialer Config Telephone Line - T e l e p h o n e L i n e - 1 L i n e 1 D i a l t y p e 2 L i n e 2 D i a l t y p e 3 L i n e 1 D i a l t o n e 4 L i n e 2 D i a l t o n e 5 N u m o f R e t r i e s...
  • Page 731 MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Command Menu-->Dialer-Config Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Report Options - Report Options - 1 Alarm Prio. 2 Trouble Prio.
  • Page 732 Configuration Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report Options Use this function to select the functionality of the dialer. In 6.Dialer operation mode DACT mode only common [X] (U)DACT ->Default trouble/alarm/supervisory are D i a l e r O p e r . M o d e : [ ] DACT reported while in UDACT mode all point information is...

  • Page 733: Test Dialer (Command-Menu)

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Command Menu-->Dialer-Config Dialer Enable/Disable D i a l e r E n a / D i s The dialer is enabled by default. [ X ] E N A B L E When the dialer is enabled or [X] ENABLE ->Default disabled, a warning message...
  • Page 734 Configuration Dialer Test Messages The following messages will display during the test processes of Lines #1 and #2. The messages that will appear depend on the status of the dialer and the test results that are found. The dialer is checking the line for voltage. This Dialer idle now message automatically displays when Maual Test is selected.

  • Page 735: Bypass Det Ckt (Command-Menu)

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual 11. Bypass Det Ckt (Command-Menu) Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Initiating zones may be bypassed individually.

  • Page 736: Exit (Command-Menu)

    Configuration 14. Exit (Command-Menu) Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300 on page 39 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Pressing “ENTER” after selecting “Exit” from the main menu will return the panel to normal LCD operation. Zone messages Point annunciation is indicated on the LCD display.
  • Page 737 MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual AC Power Fail The AC power fail trouble is generated when the power drops below the UL specified value. The trouble is restored when the power returns to the normal value. T ro u b le c o d e T ro u b le In fo T ro u b le T yp e A C P o w e r F a i l...
  • Page 738 Configuration Remote Annunciator Troubles related to the annunciator can have two possibilities: either the main panel and annunciator failed to communicate with each other, or an unconfigured remote annunciator is responding to the main panel. In both the cases, the following trouble message is displayed: T ro u b le in fo T ro u b le T yp e T ro u b le c o d e...
  • Page 739 MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Supervised auxiliary supply The supervised auxiliary supply is supervised for shorts. When a short is detected on supervised aux supply the power is cut off and a trouble message is generated. Press the system “RESET” key to restore power to the system.
  • Page 740 Configuration If there is an open detected on the city tie output, the following trouble message is displayed: T ro u b le c o d e T ro u b le In fo T ro u b le T yp e C i t y T i e t r o u b l e T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1 "IN F O "...

  • Page 741: Appendix A: Compatible Receivers

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A: Compatible Receivers The dialers that are built into select models of the MR-2300 Series Fire Alarm Control Panels are compatible with the following Digital Alarm Communicator Receivers (DACR): DACR Receiver Model Protocols SurGard MLR2 Multi-Line Receiver (ULC, ULI approved) SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID...

  • Page 742: Appendix B: Reporting

    Appendix B: Reporting Appendix B: Reporting Ademco Contact-ID MR-2300 Event Codes Event Description Event Family Qualifier Code Group # Contact # Phone Line #1 trouble detected Trouble New event 1 351 Phone Line #2 trouble detected Trouble New event 1 352 Phone Line #1 trouble restored Trouble Restore...

  • Page 743: Security Industries Association Sia-Dcs

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Security Industries Association SIA-DCS SIA protocol does not define indicating zone troubles, but lists it as Untyped Zone Trouble/Restore. MR-2300 Event Codes SIA Event Event Description Event Family Qualifier Parameter Code Phone Line #1 trouble detected Trouble New event Phone Line #2 trouble detected...

  • Page 744: Appendix C: Specifications

    Appendix C: Specifications Appendix C: Specifications MR-2300 Fire Alarm Control Panel (LCD) MR-2312-R12/2306-R6 Relay adder module Must be connected to a listed power-limited source of supply Digital Signal Processor (DSP) based design. Fully configurable Contact rating NO / NC / 28VDC per contact / 1A resistive load using front panel LCD display with Password Access.
  • Page 745 MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual System Model: MR-2300 Series LCD Version Fire Alarm Control Panel System Type: Local, Auxiliary (using MR-2300-PR), Remote Protected Premise Station (using MR-2300- PR or MR-2312-DDR or MR-2306-DDR) Central Station Protected Premises (using MR-2312-DDR or MR-2306-DDR) Type of Service: A, M, WF, SS Type of Signalling: Non-Coded...

  • Page 746: Appendix D: Power Supply And Battery Calculations (Selection Guide)

    Assume three Initiating Circuits are in alarm. Use 0.084 for five minutes of alarm or 0.5 for thirty minutes of alarm as a multiplier figure. Using the Secutron 1400 2-wire smoke detector. Total Current Requirement:ALARM (B) _____ Amps. (Value obtained from column B) Battery Capacity Requirement: ([STANDBY (A) ______ ] X [(24 or 60 Hours) ___ ]) + ([ALARM (B) ______ ] X [ ' Alarm in Hr.] _____) = (C) ______AH...
  • Page 747 MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Battery Selection: Multiply (C) by 1.20 to derate battery.

  • Page 748: Warranty & Warning Information

    Warranty & Warning Information Warranty & Warning Information Warning Please Read Carefully Note to End Users: This equipment is subject to terms and conditions of sale as follows: Note to Installers This warning contains vital information. As the only individual in contact with system users, it is your responsibility to bring each item in this warning to the attention of the users of this system.
  • Page 749 Secutron shall not be liable for any delays, breakdowns, interruptions, loss, destruction, alteration or other problems in the use of a product arising our of, or caused by, the software.

  • Page 750: Limited Warranty

    During the warranty period, Secutron Inc. shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials. Any replacement and/or repaired parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer.

  • Page 751: Out Of Warranty Repairs

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version Installation and Operation Manual Out of Warranty Repairs Secutron Inc. will at its option repair or replace out-of-warranty products which are returned to its factory according to the following conditions. Anyone returning goods to Secutron Inc. must first obtain an authorization number.
  • Page 752 No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron. Canada U.S.A 25 Interchange Way...
  • Page 753 M R - 2 3 2 0 S E R I E S Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel NSTALLATION & UIDE Revision 2 Document #: LT-951SEC WARNING: This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer.
  • Page 754 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Contents Industry Canada and FCC Notice ..................1 Introduction ..........................2 Panel Type..........................2 Overall Features ........................2 Conventions ..........................3 Circuits ..........................3 Zone............................3 Display Points ........................3 Wiring Styles ......................... 3 System Components .......................
  • Page 755 Contents Configuration........................... 32 Using the CFG-300 Tool ...................... 32 Entering the Passcode ......................33 How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320............... 34 Command Menu........................34 1. Panel Config (Command-Menu) ..................35 2. Set Time (Command-Menu)..................... 41 3. Set password (Command-Menu) ..................42 4.
  • Page 756 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual List of Tables & Figures Tables Table 1: Connectors and Jumpers on the Main Fire Alarm Board ........11 Table 2: MR-2300-PR jumper settings ...................13 Table 3: Initiating Circuit Wiring ....................23 Table 4: Indicating Circuit Wiring ..................23 Figures Figure 1: Box dimensions, semi-flush mounting and trim ring ..........7 Figure 2: Installation of Adder Modules ................9...
  • Page 757 List of Tables & Figures...

  • Page 758: Industry Canada And Fcc Notice

    Contact your telephone company if you have any questions about your phone line. In the event repairs are ever needed on the Communicator, they should be performed by Secutron Inc. or an authorized representative of Secutron Inc. For information contact...

  • Page 759: Introduction

    Introduction Introduction Secutron’s MR-2320 Series Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel performs the function of fire suppression in a wide variety of applications. It is capable of being used in an agent release sprinkler system or in a pre-action or deluge sprinkler system. It can be used in single-hazard or dual-hazard applications with or without cross-zoning.

  • Page 760: Conventions

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Conventions Circuits Refers to an actual electrical interface for initiating (detection), indicating (signal), and releasing. Zone Is a logical concept for a Fire Alarm Protected Area, and will consist of at least one Circuit. Often the terms Zone and Circuit are used interchangeably, but in this Manual the term Circuit is used.

  • Page 761: System Components

    System Components System Components Main Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel Model Description Six Zone Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel with LED display (red or white door, black box), six Class B (Style B) initiating circuits, and four Class B (Style Y) output circuits.

  • Page 762: Smart Relay Module

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Smart Relay Module Model Description Smart Relay Module MR-2312-SW12 (12 relays) with white enclosure Smart Relay Module MR-2312-SR12 (12 relays) with red enclosure MR-2300 SERIES REMOTE RELAY Input Class A Converter: Six Circuits Model Description Input Class A converter Module (six circuits).

  • Page 763: Active End-Of-Line

    System Components Active end-of-line The ELRX-400R(W) are power-saving End-of-Line resistors that eliminate the need for an additional battery cabinet or larger batteries in order to meet the 60 hour standby requirement. Model Description ELRX-400 Active end-of-line resistor without plate Active end-of-line resistor with end-of- BLACK ELRX-400R line red plate...

  • Page 764: Mechanical Installation

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Mechanical Installation Installing the Enclosure Install the MR-2320 Series panel enclosure as shown below. Mount enclosure surface mount using the four mounting holes with the provided screws. Figure 1: Box dimensions, semi-flush mounting and trim ring 11"...
  • Page 765 Mechanical Installation The figure below shows a cross-section of the semi-flush mounted backbox and the trim ring. Make sure to allow a minimum depth of 1” above the wall surface for proper door opening. TRIM RING WALL MIN 1” WOOD OR METAL STUD BACKBOX...

  • Page 766: Installing The Adder Modules

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Installing the Adder Modules The MR-2320 Series panel comes pre-assembled with all components and boards except for adder modules. Module installation locations are shown below. Refer to Figure 3 on the next page for Jumper or DIP Switch settings and see Wiring Tables and Information on page 23 for wiring specifications.

  • Page 767: Cable And Jumper Connections For Main Board And Adder Modules

    Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules Main Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Board Figure 3: Main Control Board cable connector and jumper settings JW3-Removed all the time For front panel programming use CFG -300 configuration tool not UL-864 or ULC-S527 listed.

  • Page 768: Mr-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Table 1: Connectors and Jumpers on the Main Fire Alarm Board Remove this jumper if MR-2300-PR is connected. Cable from connector P1 of the MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module connects here. Otherwise not used. Remove this jumper if an MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module is used. Removed all the time.

  • Page 769: Mr-2300-Nc2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module

    Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules MR-2300-NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module Figure 5: MR-2300-NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module mounting hole for #6-32 screws OCAC-302 MR-2300-NC2 mounting hole for #6-32 screws Indicating circuits must be wired from the MR-2300-NC2 to the main Fire Alarm board. For example indicating circuit 1 positive (red wire) and negative (black wire) is wired from the Class A converter module to the positive and negative terminals of Indicating circuit 1 on the Main Fire Alarm board.

  • Page 770: Polarity Reversal And City Tie Module (Model Mr-2300-Pr)

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (Model MR-2300-PR) Figure 7: Polarity reversal and city tie module Mounting hole for #6-32 screws Mounting hole for #6-32 screws The following hardware configuration must be performed before installing the MR-2300-PR. Table 2: MR-2300-PR jumper settings Cable connects to P5 on the Main Board Cut this jumper for Trouble transmission.

  • Page 771: Field Wiring

    Field Wiring Field Wiring Main Board Field Wiring Wire devices to the terminals as shown in the figures that follow. Refer to Wiring Tables and Information on page 23 for wire gauges and Appendix D on page 80 for specifications. CAUTION: Do not exceed power supply ratings.
  • Page 772 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Figure 9: Initiating circuit– Class A or Style D Wiring MR-2300-A DCAC-306 CLASS A CONVERTER MODULE STYLE D WIRING FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD INITIATING CIRCUIT - 1 ALARM ZONE INITIATING CIRCUIT #1 INITIATING STYLE D CIRCUIT #2 WIRING INITIATING...

  • Page 773: Abort And Manual Release Switch Wiring

    Field Wiring Abort and Manual Release Switch Wiring Wiring for the abort and manual release switches is shown in Figures 10 and 11. Depending on the selected mode, the Abort and Manual release switches can either be on different circuits or they both can be on the same circuit. When on separate circuits, DET5 is used for the Abort switch and DET6 is used for the manual release switch.
  • Page 774 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Figure 11: Abort and Manal Release Switch Class A or Style D Wiring Abort and Manual Release switches on separate circuits MR-2300-A CLASS A FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD CONVERTER MODULE INITIATING CIRCUIT #5 INITIATING CIRCUIT #6 Abort and Manual Release switches on a combined circuit Current limiter...

  • Page 775: Indicating Circuit Wiring

    Field Wiring Indicating Circuit Wiring The MR-2320 Series Fire Alarm supports Class B or Style Y and Class A Style Z wiring for its indicating circuits. Each circuit is supervised by a 3.9KΩ EOL resistor or active EOL module. Each indicating circuit provides up to 1.7 A, 5 A maximum total if no auxiliaries are used.

  • Page 776: Dialer Wiring

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Releasing Circuit Wiring Wiring for the releasing circuit is shown in Figure 14, below. SIG3 and SIG4 output circuits are reserved for the releasing circuits. Solenoid EOL module (MP-320R/W) is used to supervise the solenoid coil. If the solenoid is already fitted with the directional diode then only the 3.9KΩ...

  • Page 777: Relay Adder Module Wiring

    Field Wiring Figure 16: Four-wire smoke detector wiring FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD POWER RESETTABLE 4-WIRE SMOKE DETECTOR POWER SUPPLY 22VDC, 200mA MAX. CURRENT - 300mA MAX. RIPPLE VOL. 5mV (POWER LIMITED) DETECTION END OF LINE RELAY 4-WIRE DETECTION DEVICE LISTED S3403 MODEL A77-716B TO INITIATING MANUFACTURED BY...

  • Page 778: Polarity Reversal And City Tie Module (Mr-2300-Pr) Wiring

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (MR-2300-PR) Wiring Wire MR-2300-PR Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (if used) as shown in Figure 18, below. See Appendix D on page 80 for module specifications. Power Limited cable type FPL, FPLR or FPLP must be used. For USA installation, the installer must use Atlantic Scientific (Tel: 407-725-8000), Model #24544 Protective Device, or similar UL-Listed QVRG secondary protector, as shown.

  • Page 779: Power Supply Connection

    Field Wiring Power Supply Connection The power supply is part of the Main Chassis. The ratings are: Type Rating 120 VAC 60Hz 1.7A /240 VAC 50 Hz 0.85 A, 10A slow Electrical Input rating blow fuse on secondary of transformer Power supply total current 6.5A AC maximim @ secondary of transformer Battery fuse on Main...

  • Page 780: Wiring Tables And Information

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Wiring Tables and Information Table 3: Initiating Circuit Wiring Wire gauge Maximum wiring run to last device Feet Meters 2990 4760 1450 7560 2300 12000 3600 19000 5800 30400 9200 Notes: • For Class A the maximum wiring run to the last device is divided by two. •...

  • Page 781: Auxiliary Power (Unregulated)

    Field Wiring Auxiliary Power (unregulated) This regulated supply is not supervised. This supply is rated at 24VDC FWR/1.7A max. If there is a short on this circuit, the auxiliary power does not recover automatically when the short is removed. This power supply must be disconnected, then reconnected and the panel reset to re-establish the auxiliary power supply.

  • Page 782: System Checkout

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual System Checkout Before turning the power “ON” To prevent sparking, do not connect the batteries. Connect the batteries after powering the system from the main AC supply. 1. Check that all modules are installed in the proper location with the proper connections. 2.

  • Page 783: Indicators, Controls And Operations

    • Trouble Flash (Trouble)- 20 flashes per minute, 50% duty cycle Note that each display is supplied with laser printer printable paper labels for sliding into the plastic label template on the panel. For the Main Display, the paper label is Secutron #ND-2056SEC. Common LED indicators AC ON The AC ON led is on steady green while the main AC power is within acceptable levels.
  • Page 784 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual COMMON ALARM The common alarm led is illuminated steady red as a result of any active alarm present in the system COMMON TROUBLE The common trouble led in illuminated steady amber as a result of a trouble condition being detected on the system BATTERY TROUBLE Flashes amber at a slow rate, when the battery voltage is lower than the specified threshold or the battery is off line.

  • Page 785: Menu Buttons

    Indicators, Controls and Operations Menu Buttons To use the menu buttons you will need to install the CFG-300 configuration tool. See Using the CFG-300 Tool on page for details. Menu Button Pressing and entering the passcode will allow you to enter the command menu. Info Button When the system is off-normal, press to display extra information of the event.

  • Page 786: Common Controls

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Output Circuits Bypass Switch The output circuit bypass switches bypasses the NAC circuit and the releasing circuit. The switch is a toggle switch and pressing it again, will un-bypasses the output circuit the trouble LED turns off. Common Controls System Reset Button The System Reset button resets the Fire Alarm Control Panel and all Circuits.

  • Page 787: Common Relays

    Indicators, Controls and Operations When an Initiating Circuit Disconnect pushbutton is returned to the normal state (by pressing it again in order to un- bypass the circuit), the panel checks the state of the circuit. If the circuit is active, the Status Indicator flashes for 10 seconds at the Fast Rate without processing the input.

  • Page 788: Evacuation Codes

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual of Abort Delay in the configuration. When the release timer expires, the corresponding releasing circuit is activated. When the panel is in normal condition, activation of the Abort Switch will cause a trouble signal and the corresponding zone amber LED turns on at slow flash rate.

  • Page 789: Configuration

    Configuration Configuration Configure the MR-2320 Series Panels using the CFG-300 LCD Tool (see further documentation packaged with CFG-300 for configuration information). Using the CFG-300 Tool Connect the CFG-300 to the panel, then press (Menu button). The CFG-300 LCD display will display the Main Menu.

  • Page 790: Entering The Passcode

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Entering the Passcode The programming section is passcode protected. The following screen shows the message that is displayed to enter the passcode. The maximum allowable passcode is ten digits long, and permits numerical values only. Press (Enter button) after entering the passcode.

  • Page 791: Command Menu

    Configuration How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 1. Press (Menu button). You will be prompted to enter your password. 2. Enter your password, then press (Enter button) to continue. 3. Select a Command Menu option by pressing .

  • Page 792: Panel Config (Command-Menu)

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual 1. Panel Config (Command-Menu) The following is a detailed description of the MR-2320 configuration menu. Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page for detailed instructions on making menu selections. - P a n e l C o n f i g - 1 .
  • Page 793 Configuration Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Hazard Config -Hazard Param.- 1. Release timer 2. Abort Delay 3. Manual Rls Delay 4. Soak timer Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Command Menu-->Panel Config-->...
  • Page 794 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Command Menu-->Panel Config--> 0->Default (continuous) Use this function to set the length of time for which the Hazard Config The selectable values are releasing circuit is active. When 4. Soak timer in seconds: 0, 10, 20, 30, the soak timer expires, the control panel automatically 40, 50, 60, 120(2min),...
  • Page 795 Configuration Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features By default all the initiating 2. Wtr/Sprk. Retd circuits configured as waterflow or sprinkler act as non-verified [ ] ENABLE alarms. If enabled, a retard Waterflow/Sprk Retd [X] DISABLE->Default operation is performed for initiating circuits configured as [X] DISABLE waterflow or sprinkler.
  • Page 796 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features Use this function to delay the 9. Pwr Fail Tmr reporting of AC power fail [X] NONE->Default trouble for a specific time [ ] 1 HRS AC Pwr Fail Dly Tmr. period.
  • Page 797 Configuration Command Menu/MR-2320 Config/Features/ Enable this function if using an Active EOL. If MR-2300-A is 17. Active EOL used, this function should be [X] DISABLE->Default Active EOL enabled since the Class A [ ] ENABLE Converter has built in Active [X] DISABLE EOL resistors.

  • Page 798: Set Time (Command-Menu)

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual 2. Set Time (Command-Menu) Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page for detailed instructions on making menu selections. 1. Daylight Save 2. Time Clock 3. Compensation Command Menu/Set time Date 1.

  • Page 799: Set Password (Command-Menu)

    Configuration 3. Set password (Command-Menu) Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page for detailed instructions on making menu selections. First choose the level of password to be changed Select Access Level Then Enter new passcode: Re - enter ne w passcode: Use this function to change the pass-code.

  • Page 800: View Event Log (Command-Menu)

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual 4. View Event Log (Command-Menu) The event log looks the same as the normal event queue. Pressing the “INFO” key has the same effect that it does in the event queue. The illustration below provides an example of how the “INFO” key works and shows the CFG- 300 LCD Configuration tool display.

  • Page 801: Dialer Config (Command-Menu)

    Configuration 6. Dialer Config (Command-Menu) Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. The following illustration shows the dialer configuration menu. This menu will show up only if there is a built-in dialer on the main board.
  • Page 802 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info Use this function to set the telephone number of the 2.Account#1 Telephone Number monitoring station. The maximum # of digits allowed is Account#1 Telnum: 19 including “,” and numerals. The “,” will be treated as 1 sec [101]->Default delay.
  • Page 803 Configuration Command Menu-->Dialer Config Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Telephone Line -Telephone Line- 1. Line1 Dialtype 2. Line2 Dialtype 3. Line1 Dialtone 4. Line2 Dialtone 5.
  • Page 804 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone Line Set the number of retries for 5.Number of retries both line#1 and line#2. This 06 ->Default function lets the dialer retry on either line if it is busy or not Number of retries Number of Retries: available.
  • Page 805 Configuration Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report If this function is enabled, the Options Aux Disconnect feature 4. Aux Disc Alm/Supv Rpt. (obtained by pressing the Aux [ ] ENABLE Disconnect button) will block AuxDis Alm/Supv Rpt. the alarm and supervisory [X] DISABLE ->Default events from being reported [X] DISABLE through the built-in dialer.

  • Page 806: Test Dialer (Command-Menu)

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Command Menu-->Dialer-Config Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Dialer Enable/Disable Dialer Ena/Dis The dialer is enabled by [X] ENABLE default.
  • Page 807 Configuration Dialer Test Messages The following messages will display during the test processes of Lines #1 and #2. The messages that will appear depend on the status of the dialer and the test results that are found. Dialer idle now The dialer is checking the line for voltage.

  • Page 808: Exit (Command-Menu)

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual No Kissoff No Kissoff means receiver has not received any event reports. Passed: Manual Test The line passed the test; everything is OK. 8. Exit (Command-Menu) Pressing, “ENTER” after selecting “Exit“ from the menu will return the panel to normal LCD operation.

  • Page 809: Operating The Panel

    Operating the Panel Operating the Panel Panel Operation During Various Hazard States The escalating hazard zone states include Idle, Alert, Alarm and Release. They are defined based on the status of Hazard Area input zone(s), correlated Abort Switch and Manual Release Switch. Hazard Idle •...

  • Page 810: General Panel Operation

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual General Panel Operation • Activation of Manual Release Switch starts the Manual Release Delay Timer. The expiration of Manual-release Delay Timer (MDT) activates the releasing circuits consequently. Manual Release Switch overrides the Abort Switch always and Manual-release Timer (MDT) always overrides Release Timer (RT). •...

  • Page 811: Pre-Programmed Modes

    Pre-Programmed Modes Pre-Programmed Modes Mode 1: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release Detection Zones Phantom Zones Release Timers Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4 Out1 Signal Steady Out2 Signal Escalating Out3 Rel. Releasing Out4 Rel. Releasing RLS TMR 1 Started RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled RLS Tmr 2 Started RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted...
  • Page 812 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual NAC Configuration • Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State: • Hazard Idle: Off • Hazard Alert: Temporal • Hazard Alarm: 120 BPM • Hazard Release: Steady • Default NAC code of Supervisory is 20 BPM. How the Panel Works in Mode 1 •...

  • Page 813: Mode 2: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Not Cross-Zoned, Combined Release

    Pre-Programmed Modes Mode 2: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release Detection Zones Phantom Zones Release Timers Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4 Out1 Signal Steady Out2 Signal Escalating Out3 Rel. Releasing Out4 Rel. Releasing RLS TMR 1 Started RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled RLS Tmr 2 Started RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted...
  • Page 814 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual How the Panel Works in Mode 2 • Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 turns NAC-1 on steady. • Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes the Hazard Area 1 state from Idle into Alarm directly. NAC-1 turns on steady.

  • Page 815: Mode 3: Agent Release, Dual Hazard, Cross-Zoned, Split Release

    Pre-Programmed Modes Mode 3: Agent Release, Dual Hazard, Cross-zoned, Split Release Detection Zones Phantom Zones Release Timers AB/MR AB/MR Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4 Out1 Signal Steady Out2 Signal Escalating Out3 Rel. Releasing Out4 Rel. Releasing RLS TMR 1 Started RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled RLS Tmr 2 Started RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted...
  • Page 816 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual How the Panel Works in Mode 3 • Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes Hazard Area1 state from Idle into Alert. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal. • Activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 change Hazard Area1 state from Alert into Alarm. NAC-1 turns on at 120BPM. Release timer-1 is started.

  • Page 817: Mode 4: Agent Release, Dual Hazard, Not Cross-Zoned, Split Release

    Pre-Programmed Modes Mode 4: Agent Release, Dual Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Split Release Detection Zones Phantom Zones Release Timers AB/MR AB/MR Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4 Out1 Signal Steady Out2 Signal Escalating Out3 Rel. Releasing Out4 Rel. Releasing RLS TMR 1 Started RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled RLS Tmr 2 Started RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted...
  • Page 818 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual • Upon expiration of Release Timer-1. RAC-1 is activated. NAC-1 turns on Steady. • A current limit on Z-5 means Abort Switch active. Release Timer-1 is held. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal. Removal of the current limit on Z-5 means that Abort Switch is released. Release Timer -1 resumes. Release Timer value depends on Abort Delay Type.

  • Page 819: Mode 5: Pre-Action/Deluge, Single Hazard, Cross-Zoned, Combined Release

    Pre-Programmed Modes Mode 5: Pre-action/Deluge, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release Detection Zones Phantom Zones RT1 Exp Supv Z1+Z2+Z3+Z4 Out1 Signal Steady Out2 Signal Escalating Out3 Rel. Releasing Out4 Rel. Releasing RLS TMR 1 Started RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled Zone Configuration •...

  • Page 820: Mode 6: Pre-Action/Deluge, Single Hazard, Not Cross-Zoned, Combined Release

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Mode 6: Pre-action/Deluge, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release Detection Zones Phantom Zones RT1 Exp Supv Z1+Z2+Z3+Z4 Out1 Signal Steady Out2 Signal Escalating Out3 Rel. Releasing Out4 Rel. Releasing RLS TMR 1 Started RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled Zone Configuration •...

  • Page 821: Mode 7: Pre-Action/Deluge, Dual Hazard, Cross-Zoned, Split Release

    Pre-Programmed Modes Mode 7: Pre-action/Deluge, Dual Hazard, Cross-zoned, Split Release Detection Zones Phantom Zones Release Timers Supv Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4 Out1 Signal Steady Out2 Signal Escalating Out3 Rel. Releasing Out4 Rel. Releasing RLS TMR 1 Started RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled RLS Tmr 2 Started RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted RLS Tmr 2 Cancelled...
  • Page 822 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual How the Panel Works in Mode 7 • Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes Hazard Area 1 state into Alert. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal. • Activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 change Hazard Area 1 state into Alarm. Release Timer-1 is started. Upon the expiration of Release Timer-1, RAC-1 is active.

  • Page 823: Mode 8: Pre-Action/Deluge, Dual Hazard, Not Cross-Zoned, Split Release

    Pre-Programmed Modes Mode 8: Pre-action/Deluge, Dual Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Split Release Detection Zones Phantom Zones Release Timers Supv Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4 Out1 Signal Steady Out2 Signal Escalating Out3 Rel. Releasing Out4 Rel. Releasing RLS TMR 1 Started RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled RLS Tmr 2 Started RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted...
  • Page 824 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual How the Panel Works in Mode 8 • Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes Hazard Area 1 state into Alarm. Release Timer 1 is started. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal. Upon the expiration of Release Timer 1, RAC-1 is active. NAC-1 turns on steady. •...

  • Page 825: Mode 9: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-Zoned, Nyc Abort

    Pre-Programmed Modes Mode 9: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, NYC abort Detection Zones Phantom Zones Release Timers Supv Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4 Out1 Signal Steady Out2 Signal Escalating Out3 Rel. Releasing Out4 Strobe Steady RLS TMR 1 Started RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled RLS Tmr 2 Started RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted...
  • Page 826 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual How the Panel Works in Mode 9 • The activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 turns NAC-1 on steady. • The activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 turn NAC-1 off and turn NAC-2 on at 120BPM. Hazard Area 1 state changes to Alarm.

  • Page 827: Mode 10: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Not Cross-Zoned, Combined Release

    Pre-Programmed Modes Mode 10: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release Detection Zones Phantom Zones Release Timers Supv Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4 Out1 Signal Steady Out2 Signal Escalating Out3 Rel. Releasing Out4 Rel. Releasing RLS TMR 1 Started RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled RLS Tmr 2 Started RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted...
  • Page 828 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual How the Panel Works in Mode 10 • Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 turns NAC-1 on steady. • Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 turns NAC-2 on at 60BPM. Release Timer-1 is started. •...

  • Page 829: Mode 11: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-Zoned, Combined Release

    Pre-Programmed Modes Mode 11: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release Detection Zones Phantom Zones Release Timers Supv Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4 Out1 Signal Steady Out2 Signal Escalating Out3 Rel. Releasing Out4 Rel. Releasing RLS TMR 1 Started RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled RLS Tmr 2 Started RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted...
  • Page 830 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual How the Panel Works in Mode 11 • The activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 turns NAC-1 on steady. • The activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 turn NAC-1 off and turn NAC-2 on at 60BPM. Release Timer-1 is started. •...

  • Page 831: Appendix A: Compatible Receivers

    Appendix A: Compatible Receivers Appendix A: Compatible Receivers The dialers that are built into select models of the MR-2320 Series Pre-Action/Deluge Panels are compatible with the following Digital Alarm Communicator Receivers (DACR): DACR Receiver Model Protocols SurGard MLR2 Multi-Line Receiver (ULC, ULI approved) SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID SurGard SLR Single-Line Receiver (ULC, ULI approved) SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID...

  • Page 832: Appendix B: Mr-2320 Compatible Devices

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B: MR-2320 Compatible Devices series supported synchronous horn/strobe (UL and ULC listed) Horn/Strobes Maximum # of Devices Secutron MRA-HS3-24ww Amseco/Potter FHS-240-110 System Sensor P1224MC Wheelock NS-24MCW-FW MR-2320 series supported synchronous module (UL and ULC listed)
  • Page 833 Appendix B: MR-2320 Compatible Devices MR-2320 series compatible two-wire smoke detectors (ULC listed) Make Model/Base System Sensor 1400A 2400A 1451/B401B 2451/B401B MR-2320 series compatible two-wire smoke detectors (UL listed) Make Model/Base Compatibility Identifier Rated standby current head/base (mA) System Sensor 1400 A- N/A 0.10...

  • Page 834: Appendix C: Reporting

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Appendix C: Reporting Ademco Contact-ID MR-2320 Event Codes Event Description Event Family Qualifier Code Group # Contact # Phone Line #1 trouble detected Trouble New event 1 351 Phone Line #2 trouble detected Trouble New event 1 352 Phone Line #1 trouble restored...

  • Page 835: Security Industries Association Sia-Dcs

    Appendix C: Reporting Security Industries Association SIA-DCS SIA protocol does not define indicating zone troubles, but lists it as Untyped Zone Trouble/Restore. MR-2320 Event Codes SIA Event Event Description Event Family Qualifier Parameter Code Phone Line #1 trouble detected Trouble New event Phone Line #2 trouble detected Trouble...

  • Page 836: Appendix D: Specifications

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D: Specifications MR-2320 series pre-action/deluge, releasing control MR-2306-R6 Relay adder module panel Digital Signal Processor (DSP) based design. Fully configurable Must be connected to a listed power-limited source of supply using front panel LCD display with Password Access. Contact rating FormC/ 28VDC per contact / 1A resistive load Electrical Ratings max, zoned...

  • Page 837: Appendix E: Power Supply And Battery Calculations (Selection Guide)

    Appendix E: Power Supply and Battery Calculations (Selection Guide) Appendix E: Power Supply and Battery Calculations (Selection Guide) Use the form below to determine the required secondary power supply (batteries). IMPORTANT NOTICE The main AC branch circuit connection for Fire Alarm Control Panel must provide a dedicated continuous power without provision of any disconnect devices.
  • Page 838 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Warranty & Warning Information Warning Please Read Carefully Note to End Users: This equipment is subject to terms and conditions of sale as follows: Note to Installers This warning contains vital information. As the only individual in contact with system users, it is your responsibility to bring each item in this warning to the attention of the users of this system.
  • Page 839 Secutron shall not be liable for any delays, breakdowns, interruptions, loss, destruction, alteration or other problems in the use of a product arising our of, or caused by, the software.

  • Page 840: Warranty

    During the warranty period, Secutron Inc. shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials. Any replacement and/or repaired parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer.
  • Page 841 Warranty & Warning Information Products which Secutron Inc. determines to be repairable will be repaired and returned. A set fee which Secutron Inc. has predetermined and which may be revised from time to time, will be charged for each unit repaired.
  • Page 842 No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron. Canada U.S.A 25 Interchange Way...
  • Page 843 M R - 2 3 2 0 S E R I E S Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel NSTALLATION & PERATION UIDE Revision 2 Document #: LT-951SEC WARNING: This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer.
  • Page 844 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Contents Industry Canada and FCC Notice ..................1 Introduction ..........................2 Panel Type..........................2 Overall Features ........................2 Conventions ..........................3 Circuits ..........................3 Zone............................3 Display Points ........................3 Wiring Styles ......................... 3 System Components .......................
  • Page 845 Contents Configuration........................... 32 Using the CFG-300 Tool ...................... 32 Entering the Passcode ......................33 How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320............... 34 Command Menu........................34 1. Panel Config (Command-Menu) ..................35 2. Set Time (Command-Menu)..................... 41 3. Set password (Command-Menu) ..................42 4.

  • Page 846: List Of Tables & Figures

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual List of Tables & Figures Tables Table 1: Connectors and Jumpers on the Main Fire Alarm Board ........11 Table 2: MR-2300-PR jumper settings ...................13 Table 3: Initiating Circuit Wiring ....................23 Table 4: Indicating Circuit Wiring ..................23 Figures Figure 1: Box dimensions, semi-flush mounting and trim ring ..........7 Figure 2: Installation of Adder Modules ................9...
  • Page 847 List of Tables & Figures...

  • Page 848: Industry Canada And Fcc Notice

    Contact your telephone company if you have any questions about your phone line. In the event repairs are ever needed on the Communicator, they should be performed by Secutron Inc. or an authorized representative of Secutron Inc. For information contact...

  • Page 849: Introduction

    Introduction Introduction Secutron’s MR-2320 Series Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel performs the function of fire suppression in a wide variety of applications. It is capable of being used in an agent release sprinkler system or in a pre-action or deluge sprinkler system. It can be used in single-hazard or dual-hazard applications with or without cross-zoning.

  • Page 850: Conventions

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Conventions Circuits Refers to an actual electrical interface for initiating (detection), indicating (signal), and releasing. Zone Is a logical concept for a Fire Alarm Protected Area, and will consist of at least one Circuit. Often the terms Zone and Circuit are used interchangeably, but in this Manual the term Circuit is used.

  • Page 851: System Components

    System Components System Components Main Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel Model Description Six Zone Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Panel with LED display (red or white door, black box), six Class B (Style B) initiating circuits, and four Class B (Style Y) output circuits.

  • Page 852: Smart Relay Module

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Smart Relay Module Model Description Smart Relay Module MR-2312-SW12 (12 relays) with white enclosure Smart Relay Module MR-2312-SR12 (12 relays) with red enclosure MR-2300 SERIES REMOTE RELAY Input Class A Converter: Six Circuits Model Description Input Class A converter Module (six circuits).

  • Page 853: Active End-Of-Line

    System Components Active end-of-line The ELRX-400R(W) are power-saving End-of-Line resistors that eliminate the need for an additional battery cabinet or larger batteries in order to meet the 60 hour standby requirement. Model Description ELRX-400 Active end-of-line resistor without plate Active end-of-line resistor with end-of- BLACK ELRX-400R line red plate...

  • Page 854: Mechanical Installation

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Mechanical Installation Installing the Enclosure Install the MR-2320 Series panel enclosure as shown below. Mount enclosure surface mount using the four mounting holes with the provided screws. Figure 1: Box dimensions, semi-flush mounting and trim ring 11"...
  • Page 855 Mechanical Installation The figure below shows a cross-section of the semi-flush mounted backbox and the trim ring. Make sure to allow a minimum depth of 1” above the wall surface for proper door opening. TRIM RING WALL MIN 1” WOOD OR METAL STUD BACKBOX...

  • Page 856: Installing The Adder Modules

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Installing the Adder Modules The MR-2320 Series panel comes pre-assembled with all components and boards except for adder modules. Module installation locations are shown below. Refer to Figure 3 on the next page for Jumper or DIP Switch settings and see Wiring Tables and Information on page 23 for wiring specifications.

  • Page 857: Cable And Jumper Connections For Main Board And Adder Modules

    Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules Main Pre-Action/Deluge and Agent Release Control Board Figure 3: Main Control Board cable connector and jumper settings JW3-Removed all the time For front panel programming use CFG -300 configuration tool not UL-864 or ULC-S527 listed.

  • Page 858: Mr-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Table 1: Connectors and Jumpers on the Main Fire Alarm Board Remove this jumper if MR-2300-PR is connected. Cable from connector P1 of the MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module connects here. Otherwise not used. Remove this jumper if an MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module is used. Removed all the time.

  • Page 859: Mr-2300-Nc2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module

    Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules MR-2300-NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module Figure 5: MR-2300-NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module mounting hole for #6-32 screws OCAC-302 MR-2300-NC2 mounting hole for #6-32 screws Indicating circuits must be wired from the MR-2300-NC2 to the main Fire Alarm board. For example indicating circuit 1 positive (red wire) and negative (black wire) is wired from the Class A converter module to the positive and negative terminals of Indicating circuit 1 on the Main Fire Alarm board.

  • Page 860: Polarity Reversal And City Tie Module (Model Mr-2300-Pr)

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (Model MR-2300-PR) Figure 7: Polarity reversal and city tie module Mounting hole for #6-32 screws Mounting hole for #6-32 screws The following hardware configuration must be performed before installing the MR-2300-PR. Table 2: MR-2300-PR jumper settings Cable connects to P5 on the Main Board Cut this jumper for Trouble transmission.

  • Page 861: Field Wiring

    Field Wiring Field Wiring Main Board Field Wiring Wire devices to the terminals as shown in the figures that follow. Refer to Wiring Tables and Information on page 23 for wire gauges and Appendix D on page 80 for specifications. CAUTION: Do not exceed power supply ratings.
  • Page 862 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Figure 9: Initiating circuit– Class A or Style D Wiring MR-2300-A DCAC-306 CLASS A CONVERTER MODULE STYLE D WIRING FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD INITIATING CIRCUIT - 1 ALARM ZONE INITIATING CIRCUIT #1 INITIATING STYLE D CIRCUIT #2 WIRING INITIATING...

  • Page 863: Abort And Manual Release Switch Wiring

    Field Wiring Abort and Manual Release Switch Wiring Wiring for the abort and manual release switches is shown in Figures 10 and 11. Depending on the selected mode, the Abort and Manual release switches can either be on different circuits or they both can be on the same circuit. When on separate circuits, DET5 is used for the Abort switch and DET6 is used for the manual release switch.
  • Page 864 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Figure 11: Abort and Manal Release Switch Class A or Style D Wiring Abort and Manual Release switches on separate circuits MR-2300-A CLASS A FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD CONVERTER MODULE INITIATING CIRCUIT #5 INITIATING CIRCUIT #6 Abort and Manual Release switches on a combined circuit Current limiter...

  • Page 865: Indicating Circuit Wiring

    Field Wiring Indicating Circuit Wiring The MR-2320 Series Fire Alarm supports Class B or Style Y and Class A Style Z wiring for its indicating circuits. Each circuit is supervised by a 3.9KΩ EOL resistor or active EOL module. Each indicating circuit provides up to 1.7 A, 5 A maximum total if no auxiliaries are used.

  • Page 866: Dialer Wiring

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Releasing Circuit Wiring Wiring for the releasing circuit is shown in Figure 14, below. SIG3 and SIG4 output circuits are reserved for the releasing circuits. Solenoid EOL module (MP-320R/W) is used to supervise the solenoid coil. If the solenoid is already fitted with the directional diode then only the 3.9KΩ...

  • Page 867: Relay Adder Module Wiring

    Field Wiring Figure 16: Four-wire smoke detector wiring FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD POWER RESETTABLE 4-WIRE SMOKE DETECTOR POWER SUPPLY 22VDC, 200mA MAX. CURRENT - 300mA MAX. RIPPLE VOL. 5mV (POWER LIMITED) DETECTION END OF LINE RELAY 4-WIRE DETECTION DEVICE LISTED S3403 MODEL A77-716B TO INITIATING MANUFACTURED BY...

  • Page 868: Polarity Reversal And City Tie Module (Mr-2300-Pr) Wiring

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (MR-2300-PR) Wiring Wire MR-2300-PR Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (if used) as shown in Figure 18, below. See Appendix D on page 80 for module specifications. Power Limited cable type FPL, FPLR or FPLP must be used. For USA installation, the installer must use Atlantic Scientific (Tel: 407-725-8000), Model #24544 Protective Device, or similar UL-Listed QVRG secondary protector, as shown.

  • Page 869: Power Supply Connection

    Field Wiring Power Supply Connection The power supply is part of the Main Chassis. The ratings are: Type Rating 120 VAC 60Hz 1.7A /240 VAC 50 Hz 0.85 A, 10A slow Electrical Input rating blow fuse on secondary of transformer Power supply total current 6.5A AC maximim @ secondary of transformer Battery fuse on Main...

  • Page 870: Wiring Tables And Information

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Wiring Tables and Information Table 3: Initiating Circuit Wiring Wire gauge Maximum wiring run to last device Feet Meters 2990 4760 1450 7560 2300 12000 3600 19000 5800 30400 9200 Notes: • For Class A the maximum wiring run to the last device is divided by two. •...

  • Page 871: Auxiliary Power (Unregulated)

    Field Wiring Auxiliary Power (unregulated) This regulated supply is not supervised. This supply is rated at 24VDC FWR/1.7A max. If there is a short on this circuit, the auxiliary power does not recover automatically when the short is removed. This power supply must be disconnected, then reconnected and the panel reset to re-establish the auxiliary power supply.

  • Page 872: System Checkout

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual System Checkout Before turning the power “ON” To prevent sparking, do not connect the batteries. Connect the batteries after powering the system from the main AC supply. 1. Check that all modules are installed in the proper location with the proper connections. 2.

  • Page 873: Indicators, Controls And Operations

    • Trouble Flash (Trouble)- 20 flashes per minute, 50% duty cycle Note that each display is supplied with laser printer printable paper labels for sliding into the plastic label template on the panel. For the Main Display, the paper label is Secutron #ND-2056SEC. Common LED indicators AC ON The AC ON led is on steady green while the main AC power is within acceptable levels.
  • Page 874 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual COMMON ALARM The common alarm led is illuminated steady red as a result of any active alarm present in the system COMMON TROUBLE The common trouble led in illuminated steady amber as a result of a trouble condition being detected on the system BATTERY TROUBLE Flashes amber at a slow rate, when the battery voltage is lower than the specified threshold or the battery is off line.

  • Page 875: Menu Buttons

    Indicators, Controls and Operations Menu Buttons To use the menu buttons you will need to install the CFG-300 configuration tool. See Using the CFG-300 Tool on page for details. Menu Button Pressing and entering the passcode will allow you to enter the command menu. Info Button When the system is off-normal, press to display extra information of the event.

  • Page 876: Common Controls

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Output Circuits Bypass Switch The output circuit bypass switches bypasses the NAC circuit and the releasing circuit. The switch is a toggle switch and pressing it again, will un-bypasses the output circuit the trouble LED turns off. Common Controls System Reset Button The System Reset button resets the Fire Alarm Control Panel and all Circuits.

  • Page 877: Common Relays

    Indicators, Controls and Operations When an Initiating Circuit Disconnect pushbutton is returned to the normal state (by pressing it again in order to un- bypass the circuit), the panel checks the state of the circuit. If the circuit is active, the Status Indicator flashes for 10 seconds at the Fast Rate without processing the input.

  • Page 878: Evacuation Codes

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual of Abort Delay in the configuration. When the release timer expires, the corresponding releasing circuit is activated. When the panel is in normal condition, activation of the Abort Switch will cause a trouble signal and the corresponding zone amber LED turns on at slow flash rate.

  • Page 879: Configuration

    Configuration Configuration Configure the MR-2320 Series Panels using the CFG-300 LCD Tool (see further documentation packaged with CFG-300 for configuration information). Using the CFG-300 Tool Connect the CFG-300 to the panel, then press (Menu button). The CFG-300 LCD display will display the Main Menu.

  • Page 880: Entering The Passcode

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Entering the Passcode The programming section is passcode protected. The following screen shows the message that is displayed to enter the passcode. The maximum allowable passcode is ten digits long, and permits numerical values only. Press (Enter button) after entering the passcode.

  • Page 881: Command Menu

    Configuration How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 1. Press (Menu button). You will be prompted to enter your password. 2. Enter your password, then press (Enter button) to continue. 3. Select a Command Menu option by pressing .

  • Page 882: Panel Config (Command-Menu)

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual 1. Panel Config (Command-Menu) The following is a detailed description of the MR-2320 configuration menu. Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page for detailed instructions on making menu selections. - P a n e l C o n f i g - 1 .
  • Page 883 Configuration Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Hazard Config -Hazard Param.- 1. Release timer 2. Abort Delay 3. Manual Rls Delay 4. Soak timer Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Command Menu-->Panel Config-->...
  • Page 884 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Command Menu-->Panel Config--> 0->Default (continuous) Use this function to set the length of time for which the Hazard Config The selectable values are releasing circuit is active. When 4. Soak timer in seconds: 0, 10, 20, 30, the soak timer expires, the control panel automatically 40, 50, 60, 120(2min),...
  • Page 885 Configuration Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features By default all the initiating 2. Wtr/Sprk. Retd circuits configured as waterflow or sprinkler act as non-verified [ ] ENABLE alarms. If enabled, a retard Waterflow/Sprk Retd [X] DISABLE->Default operation is performed for initiating circuits configured as [X] DISABLE waterflow or sprinkler.
  • Page 886 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Command Menu-->Panel Config-->Features Use this function to delay the 9. Pwr Fail Tmr reporting of AC power fail [X] NONE->Default trouble for a specific time [ ] 1 HRS AC Pwr Fail Dly Tmr. period.
  • Page 887 Configuration Command Menu/MR-2320 Config/Features/ Enable this function if using an Active EOL. If MR-2300-A is 17. Active EOL used, this function should be [X] DISABLE->Default Active EOL enabled since the Class A [ ] ENABLE Converter has built in Active [X] DISABLE EOL resistors.

  • Page 888: Set Time (Command-Menu)

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual 2. Set Time (Command-Menu) Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page for detailed instructions on making menu selections. 1. Daylight Save 2. Time Clock 3. Compensation Command Menu/Set time Date 1.

  • Page 889: Set Password (Command-Menu)

    Configuration 3. Set password (Command-Menu) Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page for detailed instructions on making menu selections. First choose the level of password to be changed Select Access Level Then Enter new passcode: Re - enter ne w passcode: Use this function to change the pass-code.

  • Page 890: View Event Log (Command-Menu)

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual 4. View Event Log (Command-Menu) The event log looks the same as the normal event queue. Pressing the “INFO” key has the same effect that it does in the event queue. The illustration below provides an example of how the “INFO” key works and shows the CFG- 300 LCD Configuration tool display.

  • Page 891: Dialer Config (Command-Menu)

    Configuration 6. Dialer Config (Command-Menu) Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. The following illustration shows the dialer configuration menu. This menu will show up only if there is a built-in dialer on the main board.
  • Page 892 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Command Menu/Dialer Config/Account Info Use this function to set the telephone number of the 2.Account#1 Telephone Number monitoring station. The maximum # of digits allowed is Account#1 Telnum: 19 including “,” and numerals. The “,” will be treated as 1 sec [101]->Default delay.
  • Page 893 Configuration Command Menu-->Dialer Config Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320 on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Telephone Line -Telephone Line- 1. Line1 Dialtype 2. Line2 Dialtype 3. Line1 Dialtone 4. Line2 Dialtone 5.
  • Page 894 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Telephone Line Set the number of retries for 5.Number of retries both line#1 and line#2. This 06 ->Default function lets the dialer retry on either line if it is busy or not Number of retries Number of Retries: available.
  • Page 895 Configuration Command Menu/Dialer-Config/Report If this function is enabled, the Options Aux Disconnect feature 4. Aux Disc Alm/Supv Rpt. (obtained by pressing the Aux [ ] ENABLE Disconnect button) will block AuxDis Alm/Supv Rpt. the alarm and supervisory [X] DISABLE ->Default events from being reported [X] DISABLE through the built-in dialer.

  • Page 896: Test Dialer (Command-Menu)

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Command Menu-->Dialer-Config Note: Refer to How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2320on page 34 for detailed instructions on making menu selections. Dialer Enable/Disable Dialer Ena/Dis The dialer is enabled by [X] ENABLE default.
  • Page 897 Configuration Dialer Test Messages The following messages will display during the test processes of Lines #1 and #2. The messages that will appear depend on the status of the dialer and the test results that are found. Dialer idle now The dialer is checking the line for voltage.

  • Page 898: Exit (Command-Menu)

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual No Kissoff No Kissoff means receiver has not received any event reports. Passed: Manual Test The line passed the test; everything is OK. 8. Exit (Command-Menu) Pressing, “ENTER” after selecting “Exit“ from the menu will return the panel to normal LCD operation.

  • Page 899: Operating The Panel

    Operating the Panel Operating the Panel Panel Operation During Various Hazard States The escalating hazard zone states include Idle, Alert, Alarm and Release. They are defined based on the status of Hazard Area input zone(s), correlated Abort Switch and Manual Release Switch. Hazard Idle •...

  • Page 900: General Panel Operation

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual General Panel Operation • Activation of Manual Release Switch starts the Manual Release Delay Timer. The expiration of Manual-release Delay Timer (MDT) activates the releasing circuits consequently. Manual Release Switch overrides the Abort Switch always and Manual-release Timer (MDT) always overrides Release Timer (RT). •...

  • Page 901: Pre-Programmed Modes

    Pre-Programmed Modes Pre-Programmed Modes Mode 1: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release Detection Zones Phantom Zones Release Timers Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4 Out1 Signal Steady Out2 Signal Escalating Out3 Rel. Releasing Out4 Rel. Releasing RLS TMR 1 Started RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled RLS Tmr 2 Started RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted...
  • Page 902 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual NAC Configuration • Default Escalating NAC code of Hazard Area State: • Hazard Idle: Off • Hazard Alert: Temporal • Hazard Alarm: 120 BPM • Hazard Release: Steady • Default NAC code of Supervisory is 20 BPM. How the Panel Works in Mode 1 •...

  • Page 903: Mode 2: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Not Cross-Zoned, Combined Release

    Pre-Programmed Modes Mode 2: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release Detection Zones Phantom Zones Release Timers Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4 Out1 Signal Steady Out2 Signal Escalating Out3 Rel. Releasing Out4 Rel. Releasing RLS TMR 1 Started RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled RLS Tmr 2 Started RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted...
  • Page 904 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual How the Panel Works in Mode 2 • Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 turns NAC-1 on steady. • Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes the Hazard Area 1 state from Idle into Alarm directly. NAC-1 turns on steady.

  • Page 905: Mode 3: Agent Release, Dual Hazard, Cross-Zoned, Split Release

    Pre-Programmed Modes Mode 3: Agent Release, Dual Hazard, Cross-zoned, Split Release Detection Zones Phantom Zones Release Timers AB/MR AB/MR Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4 Out1 Signal Steady Out2 Signal Escalating Out3 Rel. Releasing Out4 Rel. Releasing RLS TMR 1 Started RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled RLS Tmr 2 Started RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted...
  • Page 906 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual How the Panel Works in Mode 3 • Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes Hazard Area1 state from Idle into Alert. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal. • Activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 change Hazard Area1 state from Alert into Alarm. NAC-1 turns on at 120BPM. Release timer-1 is started.

  • Page 907: Mode 4: Agent Release, Dual Hazard, Not Cross-Zoned, Split Release

    Pre-Programmed Modes Mode 4: Agent Release, Dual Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Split Release Detection Zones Phantom Zones Release Timers AB/MR AB/MR Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4 Out1 Signal Steady Out2 Signal Escalating Out3 Rel. Releasing Out4 Rel. Releasing RLS TMR 1 Started RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled RLS Tmr 2 Started RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted...
  • Page 908 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual • Upon expiration of Release Timer-1. RAC-1 is activated. NAC-1 turns on Steady. • A current limit on Z-5 means Abort Switch active. Release Timer-1 is held. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal. Removal of the current limit on Z-5 means that Abort Switch is released. Release Timer -1 resumes. Release Timer value depends on Abort Delay Type.

  • Page 909: Mode 5: Pre-Action/Deluge, Single Hazard, Cross-Zoned, Combined Release

    Pre-Programmed Modes Mode 5: Pre-action/Deluge, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release Detection Zones Phantom Zones RT1 Exp Supv Z1+Z2+Z3+Z4 Out1 Signal Steady Out2 Signal Escalating Out3 Rel. Releasing Out4 Rel. Releasing RLS TMR 1 Started RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled Zone Configuration •...

  • Page 910: Mode 6: Pre-Action/Deluge, Single Hazard, Not Cross-Zoned, Combined Release

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Mode 6: Pre-action/Deluge, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release Detection Zones Phantom Zones RT1 Exp Supv Z1+Z2+Z3+Z4 Out1 Signal Steady Out2 Signal Escalating Out3 Rel. Releasing Out4 Rel. Releasing RLS TMR 1 Started RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled Zone Configuration •...

  • Page 911: Mode 7: Pre-Action/Deluge, Dual Hazard, Cross-Zoned, Split Release

    Pre-Programmed Modes Mode 7: Pre-action/Deluge, Dual Hazard, Cross-zoned, Split Release Detection Zones Phantom Zones Release Timers Supv Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4 Out1 Signal Steady Out2 Signal Escalating Out3 Rel. Releasing Out4 Rel. Releasing RLS TMR 1 Started RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled RLS Tmr 2 Started RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted RLS Tmr 2 Cancelled...
  • Page 912 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual How the Panel Works in Mode 7 • Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes Hazard Area 1 state into Alert. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal. • Activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 change Hazard Area 1 state into Alarm. Release Timer-1 is started. Upon the expiration of Release Timer-1, RAC-1 is active.

  • Page 913: Mode 8: Pre-Action/Deluge, Dual Hazard, Not Cross-Zoned, Split Release

    Pre-Programmed Modes Mode 8: Pre-action/Deluge, Dual Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Split Release Detection Zones Phantom Zones Release Timers Supv Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4 Out1 Signal Steady Out2 Signal Escalating Out3 Rel. Releasing Out4 Rel. Releasing RLS TMR 1 Started RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled RLS Tmr 2 Started RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted...
  • Page 914 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual How the Panel Works in Mode 8 • Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 changes Hazard Area 1 state into Alarm. Release Timer 1 is started. NAC-1 turns on at Temporal. Upon the expiration of Release Timer 1, RAC-1 is active. NAC-1 turns on steady. •...

  • Page 915: Mode 9: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-Zoned, Nyc Abort

    Pre-Programmed Modes Mode 9: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, NYC abort Detection Zones Phantom Zones Release Timers Supv Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4 Out1 Signal Steady Out2 Signal Escalating Out3 Rel. Releasing Out4 Strobe Steady RLS TMR 1 Started RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled RLS Tmr 2 Started RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted...
  • Page 916 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual How the Panel Works in Mode 9 • The activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 turns NAC-1 on steady. • The activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 turn NAC-1 off and turn NAC-2 on at 120BPM. Hazard Area 1 state changes to Alarm.

  • Page 917: Mode 10: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Not Cross-Zoned, Combined Release

    Pre-Programmed Modes Mode 10: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Not Cross-zoned, Combined Release Detection Zones Phantom Zones Release Timers Supv Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4 Out1 Signal Steady Out2 Signal Escalating Out3 Rel. Releasing Out4 Rel. Releasing RLS TMR 1 Started RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled RLS Tmr 2 Started RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted...
  • Page 918 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual How the Panel Works in Mode 10 • Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 turns NAC-1 on steady. • Activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 turns NAC-2 on at 60BPM. Release Timer-1 is started. •...

  • Page 919: Mode 11: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-Zoned, Combined Release

    Pre-Programmed Modes Mode 11: Agent Release, Single Hazard, Cross-zoned, Combined Release Detection Zones Phantom Zones Release Timers Supv Z1+Z2 Z3+Z4 Out1 Signal Steady Out2 Signal Escalating Out3 Rel. Releasing Out4 Rel. Releasing RLS TMR 1 Started RLS Tmr 1 Interrupted RLS Tmr 1 Cancelled RLS Tmr 2 Started RLS Tmr 2 Interrupted...
  • Page 920 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual How the Panel Works in Mode 11 • The activation of either Z-1 or Z-2 turns NAC-1 on steady. • The activations of both Z-1 and Z-2 turn NAC-1 off and turn NAC-2 on at 60BPM. Release Timer-1 is started. •...

  • Page 921: Appendix A: Compatible Receivers

    Appendix A: Compatible Receivers Appendix A: Compatible Receivers The dialers that are built into select models of the MR-2320 Series Pre-Action/Deluge Panels are compatible with the following Digital Alarm Communicator Receivers (DACR): DACR Receiver Model Protocols SurGard MLR2 Multi-Line Receiver (ULC, ULI approved) SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID SurGard SLR Single-Line Receiver (ULC, ULI approved) SIA-DCS and Ademco Contact ID...

  • Page 922: Appendix B: Mr-2320 Compatible Devices

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B: MR-2320 Compatible Devices series supported synchronous horn/strobe (UL and ULC listed) Horn/Strobes Maximum # of Devices Secutron MRA-HS3-24ww Amseco/Potter FHS-240-110 System Sensor P1224MC Wheelock NS-24MCW-FW MR-2320 series supported synchronous module (UL and ULC listed)
  • Page 923 Appendix B: MR-2320 Compatible Devices MR-2320 series compatible two-wire smoke detectors (ULC listed) Make Model/Base System Sensor 1400A 2400A 1451/B401B 2451/B401B MR-2320 series compatible two-wire smoke detectors (UL listed) Make Model/Base Compatibility Identifier Rated standby current head/base (mA) System Sensor 1400 A- N/A 0.10...

  • Page 924: Appendix C: Reporting

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Appendix C: Reporting Ademco Contact-ID MR-2320 Event Codes Event Description Event Family Qualifier Code Group # Contact # Phone Line #1 trouble detected Trouble New event 1 351 Phone Line #2 trouble detected Trouble New event 1 352 Phone Line #1 trouble restored...

  • Page 925: Security Industries Association Sia-Dcs

    Appendix C: Reporting Security Industries Association SIA-DCS SIA protocol does not define indicating zone troubles, but lists it as Untyped Zone Trouble/Restore. MR-2320 Event Codes SIA Event Event Description Event Family Qualifier Parameter Code Phone Line #1 trouble detected Trouble New event Phone Line #2 trouble detected Trouble...

  • Page 926: Appendix D: Specifications

    MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Appendix D: Specifications MR-2320 series pre-action/deluge, releasing control MR-2306-R6 Relay adder module panel Digital Signal Processor (DSP) based design. Fully configurable Must be connected to a listed power-limited source of supply using front panel LCD display with Password Access. Contact rating FormC/ 28VDC per contact / 1A resistive load Electrical Ratings max, zoned...

  • Page 927: Appendix E: Power Supply And Battery Calculations (Selection Guide)

    Appendix E: Power Supply and Battery Calculations (Selection Guide) Appendix E: Power Supply and Battery Calculations (Selection Guide) Use the form below to determine the required secondary power supply (batteries). IMPORTANT NOTICE The main AC branch circuit connection for Fire Alarm Control Panel must provide a dedicated continuous power without provision of any disconnect devices.
  • Page 928 MR-2320 Series Installation and Operation Manual Warranty & Warning Information Warning Please Read Carefully Note to End Users: This equipment is subject to terms and conditions of sale as follows: Note to Installers This warning contains vital information. As the only individual in contact with system users, it is your responsibility to bring each item in this warning to the attention of the users of this system.
  • Page 929 Secutron shall not be liable for any delays, breakdowns, interruptions, loss, destruction, alteration or other problems in the use of a product arising our of, or caused by, the software.
  • Page 930 During the warranty period, Secutron Inc. shall, at its option, repair or replace any defective product upon return of the product to its factory, at no charge for labor and materials. Any replacement and/or repaired parts are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer.
  • Page 931 Warranty & Warning Information Products which Secutron Inc. determines to be repairable will be repaired and returned. A set fee which Secutron Inc. has predetermined and which may be revised from time to time, will be charged for each unit repaired.
  • Page 932 No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron. Canada U.S.A 25 Interchange Way...
  • Page 933 M R - 2 3 0 0 S E R I E S LED Fire Alarm Control Panel UIDE Revision A Document #: LT-953SEC WARNING: This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer.
  • Page 934 Secutron Inc. Secutron Inc. 25 Interchange Way Vaughan, ON L4K 5W3 Please call us at 1-888-SECUTRON (1-888-732-8876) if problems arise with the installation or operation of these panels. For general product information, visit the Secutron web site: www.secutron.com.
  • Page 935 Cautions and Warnings READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depends upon proper installation. DO NOT INSTALL ANY PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED. Upon unpacking your equipment, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage.
  • Page 936 MR-2300 Series LED Version User Guide Contents Contents............................ i Introduction ..........................1 About this Manual ......................... 1 Technical SupportTechnical Support ..................1 Main Display ..........................2 The Buzzer and LED Indicators ....................3 Common LED Indicators....................... 3 Alarm Circuit Indicators......................5 Supervisory Circuit Indicators ....................

  • Page 937: Introduction

    Refer to the Glossary on page 9 for an explanation of commonly used terms in this manual. Technical Support For all technical support inquiries, please contact Secutron’s Technical Support Department between 8 A.M. and 5 P.M. (EDT) Monday through Friday, excluding holidays.

  • Page 938: Main Display

    Main Display Main Display Refer to the diagram below for the LED indicators and control buttons locations. WALK A.C. TEST REMOTE COMMON TROUBLE ALARM COMMON CPU FAIL SUPV GROUND COMMON FAULT TROUBLE BATTERY TROUBLE SIGNAL SYSTEM SILENCE RESET FIRE DISCONNECT DRILL LAMP TEST...

  • Page 939: The Buzzer And Led Indicators

    MR-2300 Series LED Version User Guide The Buzzer and LED Indicators Common LED Indicators Buzzer The buzzer sounds if there is a fire alarm, a supervisory alarm, or a trouble in the fire alarm system. It turns off if the condition causing the buzzer to sound goes away or if the Buzzer Silence Button is pressed.
  • Page 940 The Buzzer and LED Indicators General Alarm LED If the panel is configured as a two-stage system, the red General Alarm LED illuminates steadily GENERAL when the General Alarm button is pushed, a General Alarm Initiating circuit is activated, or the Auto ALARM General Alarm timer times out.

  • Page 941: Alarm Circuit Indicators

    MR-2300 Series LED Version User Guide Alarm Circuit Indicators This operation applies to Initiating Circuits configured as Verified Alarm, Non-Verified Alarm, Water flow Alarm, Sprinkler Alarm, or General Alarm Circuits. The following table summarizes the indications at different events: Event Circuit Trouble LED Configuration Open circuit or (Style D)/(Class A)

  • Page 942: Trouble-Only Circuit Indicators

    The Buzzer and LED Indicators Trouble-only Circuit Indicators This operation applies to initiating circuits configured as Trouble-Only Circuits. The following table summarizes the indications in response to different events: Event Circuit Trouble LED Configuration Open circuit or (Style D)/(Class A) Flashes at the trouble rate trouble (amber)

  • Page 943: Main Display Buttons

    MR-2300 Series LED Version User Guide Main Display Buttons System Reset Button The System Reset button resets the fire alarm control panel and all circuits. SIGNAL SILENCE Signal Silence Button Pressing the Signal Silence button when the panel is in alarm deactivates any silenceable signal SIGNAL devices in the fire alarm system.

  • Page 944: Circuit (Zone) Disconnect Buttons

    Circuit (Zone) Disconnect Buttons Circuit (Zone) Disconnect Buttons Circuit (zone) disconnect buttons are provided for all initiating and indicating circuits on the fire alarm control panel. These buttons are located beside their respective indicating LEDs. Pressing a circuit disconnect button disconnects that circuit from the system and turns on its trouble indicator. While a circuit is disconnected, the panel will ignore all changes in the status (alarms and troubles) of that circuit.

  • Page 945: Glossary

    MR-2300 Series LED Version User Guide Glossary Alarm Occurs when devices such as detectors, pull stations, or sprinklers are activated. Condition In a single stage system, this condition will activate all signalling devices throughout the building. In a two stage system, this condition will activate an alert signal and the General Alarm timer.
  • Page 946 Glossary Supervisory Occurs when the system detects open circuits, short circuits, and grounds. A Condition supervisory condition is one that would interfere with the operation of the fire alarm system. Trouble Occurs when an abnormal condition such as a problem in the wiring, battery or Condition power circuits exists in the fire alarm system.
  • Page 947 No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron. Canada U.S.A 25 Interchange Way...
  • Page 948 M R - 2 3 0 0 S E R I E S LCD Fire Alarm Control Panel UIDE Revision A Document #: LT-954SEC WARNING: This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer.
  • Page 949 MR-2300 Series LCD Version User Guide Contents Introduction ..........................1 About this Manual ......................... 1 Technical Support ......................... 1 Main Display ..........................1 The Buzzer and LED Indicators ....................2 Buzzer........................... 2 AC On LED ........................... 2 Alarm LED..........................2 Supervisory LED ........................

  • Page 950: Introduction

    Refer to the Glossary on page 11 for an explanation of commonly used terms in this manual. Technical Support For all technical support inquiries, please contact Mircom’s Technical Support Department between 8 A.M. and 5 P.M. (EDT) Monday through Friday, excluding holidays. Toll-Free Phone: 1-888-SECUTRON (1-888-732-8876) Local Fax: 905-660-4113 Toll-Free Fax: 1-888-660-4113 Main Display Refer to the diagram below for the LCD display, LED indicators, and control buttons locations.

  • Page 951: The Buzzer And Led Indicators

    The Buzzer and LED Indicators The Buzzer and LED Indicators A.C. ON ALARM SUPV TRBL CPU FAIL Buzzer The buzzer sounds if there is a fire alarm, a supervisory alarm, or a trouble in the fire alarm system. It turns off if the condition causing the buzzer to sound goes away or the Buzzer Silence button is pressed.

  • Page 952: Main Display Buttons

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version User Guide Main Display Buttons System Reset Button The System Reset button resets the fire alarm control panel and all circuits. SYSTEM RESET Signal Silence Button Pressing the Signal Silence button when the panel is in alarm deactivates any silenceable signal SIGNAL devices in the fire alarm system.

  • Page 953: Disconnecting/Reconnecting A Circuit (Zone)

    Disconnecting/Reconnecting a Circuit (Zone) Disconnecting/Reconnecting a Circuit (Zone) You can disconnect and reconnect detection and signal circuits (zones) from the panel using the bypass options in the menu. To select the bypass options, you must be in the Command Menu. To enter the Command Menu, press MENU Step 1: Enter your passcode Enter your passcode.

  • Page 954: Understanding On-Screen Messages

    MR-2300 Series LCD Version User Guide Understanding On-screen Messages The LCD screen of the fire alarm control panel displays messages regarding system events. System events display on the screen in a queue. Events in this queue are listed on the screen in order of priority: alarms are of highest priority, followed by supervisory, trouble, and monitor conditions.

  • Page 955: Common Messages

    Understanding On-screen Messages Common Messages Common system messages are outlined below. AC Power Fail The “AC Power Fail” message indicates that the power has dropped below the minimum level and the system is running on backup battery power. The trouble is removed when the power returns to the normal value. T ro u b le c o d e T ro u b le In fo T ro u b le T yp e...
  • Page 956 MR-2300 Series LCD Version User Guide Ground Fault The “Ground Fault” message indicates that T ro u b le co d e T ro u b le In fo T ro u b le T yp e G r o u n d F a u l t T r b : 0 x 0 3 I n f o : 0 x 0 0 0 1 "I N F O "...
  • Page 957 Understanding On-screen Messages 4Wire Pwr. Supply The “4Wire Pwr. Supply” message indicates that the panel has detected a short on a four-wire smoke supply the power is cut off and a trouble message is generated. Press the key to restore the power the system. If the SYSTEM RESET short is removed, the panel will return to normal;...
  • Page 958 MR-2300 Series LCD Version User Guide City tie Polarity reversal - SPR-200/ Relay module The “CtyTie/MR2312 missin” message below indicates that the city tie, polarity reversal module or the relay module is not plugged in. T ro u b le co d e T ro u b le In fo T ro u b le T yp e M R 2 3 1 2 m i s s i n...

  • Page 959: Glossary

    Glossary Glossary Alarm Condition Occurs when devices such as detectors, pull stations, or sprinklers are activated. In a single stage system, this condition will activate all signalling devices throughout the building. In a two stage system, this condition will activate an alert signal and the General Alarm timer.
  • Page 960 MR-2300 Series LCD Version User Guide Trouble Flash Rate 20 flashes per minute is the rate at which an LED will flash to indicate a trouble condition. Walk Test A test performed by a technician to ensure that each detection device is connected to the panel and working properly.
  • Page 961 No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form by any means electronic, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise without the prior consent of Secutron. Canada U.S.A 25 Interchange Way...
  • Page 962 M R - 2 3 0 6 - L D LED Fire Alarm Control Panel NSTALLATION & PERATION UIDE Document #: LT-950SEC Rev. 2 February 2007 WARNING: This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer.
  • Page 964 MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual Table Of Contents Industry Canada and FCC Notice ................... 1 Introduction ..........................2 Overall Features ........................2 Conventions ..........................3 Circuits ..........................3 Zone............................3 Display Points ........................3 Wiring Styles ......................... 3 System Components ....................... 4 Main Fire Control Panel ......................
  • Page 965 Table Of Contents Single Stage Operation ......................29 Supported Protocols/Devices ....................30 Synchronous Strobes......................30 System Sensor’s i3 Devices....................30 Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool ..............32 Entering the Passcode ......................33 Command Menu........................33 How to Use the Keypad to Program the MR-2300............... 34 1.
  • Page 966 MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual List of Figres & Tables Figure 1: Box dimensions, surface mount ................7 Figure 2: Installation of Adder Modules ................8 Figure 3: Main Fire Alarm Board cable connector and jumper settings .......9 Figure 4: MR-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module ..........10 Figure 5: MR-2300-NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module ........11 Figure 6: MR-2306-R6 six relay adder module ..............11 Figure 7: MR-2306-R6 Relay programming .................12...
  • Page 967 List of Figres & Tables...

  • Page 968: Industry Canada And Fcc Notice

    Communicator, they should be performed by Secutron Fire Alarm Systems or an authorized representative of Secutron Fire Alarm Systems For information contact Secutron Fire Alarm Systems at the address and phone numbers shown on the back page of this document.

  • Page 969: Introduction

    Introduction Introduction Secutron's MR-2306 Series Fire Alarm Control Panel is a Digital Signal Processor (DSP)-based fire panel. The MR-2306 provides six supervised Class B or A (Style B or D) Initiating circuits, and four supervised Class B or A (Style Y or Z) indicating circuits. All circuits are supervised for opens and ground faults, and indicating circuits are supervised for shorts.

  • Page 970: Conventions

    MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual Conventions Circuits Refers to an actual electrical interface for Initiating (Detection) and Indicating (Signal) or Relays. Zone Is a logical concept for a Fire Alarm Protected Area, and will consist of at least one Circuit. Often the terms Zone and Circuit are used interchangeably, but in this Manual the term Circuit is used.

  • Page 971: System Components

    System Components System Components Main Fire Control Panel Model Description 6 Zone Fire Alarm Control Panel with LED display (white door, black box). 6 Class B (Style B) Initiating circuits, and two Power Limited Class B (Style Y) Indicating circuits (up to 1.70 amperes each, 5 amperes total).

  • Page 972: Remote Annunciator

    MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual Remote Annunciator Model Description 7.7" Remote Annunciator MR-2300-LCDW module, LCD display, white painted box SYSTEM NORMAL 18:01 MON 2003-04-05 A.C. ON ALARM SUPV TRBL CPU FAIL SYSTEM RESET 7.2" SIGNAL ENTER SILENCE FIRE MENU DRILL Remote Annunciator BUZZER CANCEL...

  • Page 973: Input Class A Converter: Six Circuits

    System Components Input Class A converter: Six Circuits Model Description Input Class A converter Module (six circuits). This module has MR-2300-A built in Active End-of-Line resistors. Output Class A converter: two circuits Model Description Output Class A converter module (two MR-2300-NC2 circuits) Active end-of-line...

  • Page 974: Mechanical Installation

    MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual Mechanical Installation Installing the Enclosure Install the MR-2306 Series Fire Alarm Panel enclosure as shown below. Mount enclosure surface mount using the four mounting holes, as shown and the screws provided. Figure 1: Box dimensions, surface mount Remove the door (also disconnect the ground strap), the dead front and semi-flush mount the backbox into the wall.

  • Page 975: Installing The Adder Modules

    Mechanical Installation Installing the Adder Modules MR-2306 Series Fire Alarm panels come pre-assembled with all components and boards except for Adder Modules. Module installation locations are shown below. Refer to Figure 3 on the next page for Jumper or DIP Switch settings and see Wiring Tables and Information for wiring specifications.

  • Page 976: Cable And Jumper Connections For Main Board And Adder Modules

    MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules Main Fire Alarm Board Figure 3: Main Fire Alarm Board cable connector and jumper settings JW3-Removed all the time For front panel programming use CFG -300 configuration tool not UL-864 or ULC-S527 listed.

  • Page 977: Mr-2300-A Input Class-A Converter Adder Module

    Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules Table 1: Connectors and Jumpers on the Main Fire Alarm Board Remove this jumper if MR-2300-PR is connected. Cable from connector P1 of the MR-2306-R6 Relay Adder Module connects here. Otherwise not used.

  • Page 978: Mr-2300-Nc2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module

    MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual MR-2300-NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module Figure 5: MR-2300-NC2 Output Class-A Converter Adder Module Indicating circuits must be wired from the MR-2300-NC2 to the main Fire Alarm board. For example indicating circuit 1 positive (red wire) and negative (black wire) is wired from the Class A converter module to the positive and negative terminals of Indicating circuit 1 on the Main Fire Alarm board.

  • Page 979: Figure 7: Mr-2306-R6 Relay Programming

    Cable and Jumper Connections for Main Board and Adder Modules Figure 7: MR-2306-R6 Relay programming ZONE JUMPER installed: turns ON relay when the zone (1) is active LOGICAL OR WITH ADJACENT ZONE removed: does not turn ON the relay when jumper installed: this relay 1 works in zone (1) is active conjunction with relay 2...

  • Page 980: Field Wiring

    MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual Field wiring Main Fire Alarm Board Field Wiring Wire devices to the terminals as shown in the figures that follow. Refer to the Wiring Tables on page 19 for wire gauges. CAUTION: Do not exceed power supply ratings. Initiating Circuit Wiring Wiring diagrams for the initiating circuits are shown below.

  • Page 981: Figure 10: Initiating Circuit– Class A Or Style D Wiring

    Field wiring Figure 10: Initiating circuit– Class A or Style D wiring MR-2300-A DCAC-306 CLASS A CONVERTER MODULE STYLE D WIRING FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD INITIATING CIRCUIT - 1 ALARM ZONE INITIATING CIRCUIT #1 INITIATING STYLE D CIRCUIT #2 WIRING INITIATING CIRCUIT - 2 4 MORE INITIATING...

  • Page 982: Figure 12: Indicating Circuit –Class A Or Style Z Wiring

    MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual Figure 12: Indicating circuit –Class A or Style Z wiring MR-2300-NC4 CLASS A STYLE Y CONVERTER MODULE WIRING FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD INDICATING CIRCUIT 1 INDICATING CIRCUIT #1 INDICATING CIRCUIT #2 STYLE Y WIRING INDICATING CIRCUIT 2 BELL STROBE...

  • Page 983: Relay Adder Module Wiring

    Field wiring Dialer Wiring If you have Fire Alarm Panel Model MR-2306-LD there is a dialer on board and terminals marked Line 1 and Line 2 must be wired as shown in Figure 14 below. Figure 14: Dialer wiring FIRE ALARM MAIN BOARD RJ31X GREEN...

  • Page 984: Polarity Reversal And City Tie Module (Mr-2300-Pr) Wiring

    MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (MR-2300-PR) Wiring Wire MR-2300-PR Polarity Reversal and City Tie Module (if used) as shown in Figure 16, below. Power Limited cable type FPL, FPLR or FPLP must be used. For USA installation, the installer must use Atlantic Scientific (Tel: 407-725-8000), Model #24544 Protective Device, or similar UL-Listed QVRG secondary protector, as shown.

  • Page 985: Power Supply Connection

    Field wiring Power supply connection The power supply is part of the Main Chassis. The ratings are: Type Rating 120VAC, 60Hz, 1.7A / 240VAC, 50Hz, 85A, 10A slow Electrical Input rating blow fuse on secondary of transformer Power supply total current 6.35A maximum at secondary of transformer Battery fuse on Main 10A, slow blow micro fuse...

  • Page 986: Wiring Tables And Information

    MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual Wiring Tables and Information Table 3: Initiating Circuit Wiring Wire gauge Maximum wiring run to last device Notes: Feet Meters • For Class A the maximum wiring run to the last device is 2990 divided by two. 4760 1450 •...

  • Page 987: System Checkout

    System Checkout System Checkout Before turning the power “ON” To prevent sparking, do not connect the batteries. Connect the batteries after powering the system from the main AC supply. 1. Check that all modules are installed in the proper location with the proper connections. 2.

  • Page 988: Indicators, Controls And Operations

    • Trouble Flash (Trouble)- 20 flashes per minute, 50% duty cycle Note that each display is supplied with laser printer printable paper labels for sliding into the plastic label template on the panel. For the Main Display, the paper label is Secutron# NP-2057; this includes English and French versions.

  • Page 989: Common Indicators

    Indicators, Controls and Operations Common Indicators Buzzer The Buzzer is activated by any of the following events: Fire Alarm: Steady Supervisory Alarm: Fast Flash Trouble: Trouble Flash Rate If the Buzzer is turned on in response to a Non-Latching Trouble or Supervisory, it will be turned off if the condition causing it goes away and there is no other reason for it to be on.

  • Page 990: Alarm Circuit Indicators

    MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual Signal Silence LED The Signal Silence indicator flashes amber, at the trouble rate, when indication Circuits are Silenced either by the Signal Silence button, or by the Auto Signal Silence Timer. It is turned off when the Signals are re-sounded by a subsequent Alarm.

  • Page 991: Monitor Circuit Indicators

    Indicators, Controls and Operations Monitor Circuit Indicators This operation applies to initiating circuits configured as monitor circuits. The following table summarizes the indications in response to different events. Event Circuit Trouble LED Configuration Flashes at the trouble rate Open circuit or (Style D)/(Class A) trouble (amber) Flashes at the trouble rate Monitor...

  • Page 992: Common Controls

    MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual Common Controls Menu Buttons To use the menu buttons you will need to install the CFG-300 configuration tool. See Configuration and CFG-300 Tool on page 32 for details. Menu Button Pressing and entering the passcode will allow you to enter the command menu. Info Button When the system is off-normal, press to display extra information of the event.

  • Page 993: Circuit (Zone) Disconnect Buttons

    Indicators, Controls and Operations Lamp Test Button Activation of the Lamp Test button causes all front panel Indicators to steadily illuminate and turns the buzzer ON steady. If Lamp Test is active for more than 10 seconds, Common Trouble is activated. The lamp test for CPU Fail LED is during power up.

  • Page 994: Circuit Types

    MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual Auxiliary Alarm Relay The Auxiliary Alarm Relay functions the same way as the Common Alarm Relay in every respect except that it can be disconnected by auxiliary disconnect with or without other correlated relays if it is programmed to do so (see Configuration section).

  • Page 995: Evacuation Codes

    Indicators, Controls and Operations Monitor This is a supervised general-purpose non-latching input used mainly for correlating to a relay circuit. No other system condition occurs as a result of its activation (short-circuit), although it is supervised for Trouble (open-circuit). Trouble-Only The Trouble-Only circuit monitors a Trouble Condition from an external device such as an external Audio System.

  • Page 996: Single Stage Operation

    MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual Figure 19: Evacuation and Alert Codes C O N T IN O U S T E M P O R A L C O D E 0.5s 1.5s M A R C H C O D E 0.5s C A L IF O R N IA C O D E A L E R T C O D E...

  • Page 997: Supported Protocols/Devices

    Supported Protocols/Devices Synchronous Strobes The synchronous strobe models that are supported by the MR-2306 panel include Secutron models MRL-ST and MRA-HS. A separate compatibility list is available for different supported models (LT-1007). Strobes can be configured as normal (e.g. not synchronized or any of the above; see configuration section). Any selection made is system-wide (e.g.
  • Page 998 MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual Open circuit trouble If the loop is broken the panel shows open loop trouble. The panel can still communicate with the devices depending upon where the open occurs. Z o n e - 1 T r o u b l e O p e n 1 / 1 Communication Trouble If there is a fault in the line or the line is too noisy, the panel cannot communicate with the devices.

  • Page 999: Configuration And Cfg-300 Lcd Service Tool

    Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool There are three methods of configuring the MR-2306 LED Series Fire Alarm Panels: 1. Using the CFG-300 LCD Tool (see further documentation packaged with CFG-300 for configuration informa- tion).

  • Page 1000: Entering The Passcode

    MR-2306-LD Installation and Operation Manual Entering the Passcode The programming section is passcode protected. The following screen shows the message that is displayed to enter the passcode. The maximum allowable passcode is ten digits long, and permits numerical values only. Press (Enter button) key after entering the passcode.

  • Page 1001: Panel Config (Command-Menu)

    Configuration and CFG-300 LCD Service Tool Pressing “LAMP TEST” at any time will show the information about the system and the software version as shown below. MR-2306-6LD wUDACT Version 0.0.4 The first line shows the model number and panel type and the second line shows the software version number. The version of the software is read as Major.Minor.Revision.

This manual is also suitable for:

Mr-2200

Table of Contents

Save PDF